service manual sharp al1215_1530cs_1540cs_1551cs
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE MANUALCODE : 00ZAL1551CS1EDIGITAL LASER COPIER/ DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM(AL-1551CS)MODELCONTENTSAL-1215 AL-1530CS AL-1540CS AL-1551CS[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 [ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 [ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTUTRANSCRIPT
CONTENTS
Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the machine. Be sure to replace these partswith the replacement parts specified to maintain the safety and performance of the machine.
SHARP CORPORATIONThis document has been published to be usedfor after sales service only.The contents are subject to change without notice.
SERVICE MANUALCODE : 00ZAL1551CS1E
DIGITAL LASER COPIER/DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
AL-1215AL-1530CSAL-1540CS
MODEL AL-1551CS
[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
[ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[ 6 ] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[ 7 ] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[ 8 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[ 9 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[11] USER PROGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
(AL-1551CS)
CAUTION
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achievedon the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time ofservicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as aunit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, tonercartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connectedwhen removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.
Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 770 ~ 795nmPulse times : 0.481m sec (20,787 rpm)Out put power : 0.17mW ± 0.01mW
CAUTIONINVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHTUNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UNDSICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT.NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
VARO !AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUSOHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINANÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄKATSO SÄTEESEEN.
ADVARSELUSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅRSIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AFFUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FORSTRÅLNING.
VARNING !OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DELÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄRFARLIG.
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
At the production line, the output powerof the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and ismaintained constant by the operation ofthe Automatic Power Control (APC).Even if the APC circuit fails in operationfor some reason, the maximum outputpower will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessibleemission level of 42 MICRO-WATTwhich is still-less than the limit ofCLASS-1 laser product.
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220Vmodel, 230V model and 240V model.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLAKUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLATAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄNTURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLENÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNATSÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNINGSPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTASFÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOMÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
CautionThis product contains a low power laserdevice. To ensure continued safety do notremove any cover or attempt to gain accessto the inside of the product. Refer allservicing to qualified personnel.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Operation specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. Copy performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
4. GDI Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
5. Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
6. SPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
7. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3. Production control number(lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . 3-2
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4. Motors and solenoids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . 5-1
4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6. Installing the TD cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
7. Loading copy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
8. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
9. Software for the AL-1200 (USB) series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
10. Connecting the interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
11. Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
12. USB interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
13. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
[6] COPY PROCESS
1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
3. Actual print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
4. Fuser section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . .7-4
6. Process unit new drum detection mechanism . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
7. SPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
4. Fusing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
5. Tray paper feed/transport section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
8. Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
9. SPF section (SPF model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
10. 2nd cassette section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
11. Duplex motor section (RSPF model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
12. Reverse roller section (RSPF model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
13. RSPF section (RSPF model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
4. Duplex adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
2. List of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
3. Contents of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
4. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
[11] USER PROGRAM
1. Functions that can be set with user programs . . . . . . . . . .11-1
2. Change the setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
3. Density level adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
4. Toner save mode setup and cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
2. Circuit descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. MCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
2. OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
3. I/F PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
4. POWER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
5. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
AL-1551CS GENERAL 1 - 1
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functionsConfigurations
Descriptions of itemsCPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)
SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass
2 tray: Second cassette unit.
SPF: Original feed unit
R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit
Color scanner: Color scanner function
GDI printer: GDI printer function with USB.
PCL printer: PCL printer function with USB.
SOPM: Scan Once Print Many function (Many copies are made by one scan.)
Duplex: Auto duplex copy function
Memory: Standard page memory
FAX: FAX function.
Descriptions of table: Standard provision: No function or no option available
Opt: Option
ItemCPM SB/MB 2 Tray SPF R-SPF Color
ScannerGDI
printerPCL
printer SOPM Duplex Memory FAXModelAL-1215 12CPM SB 8MAL-1530CS 13CPM SB 8MAL-1540CS 14CPM SB 8MAL-1551CS 15CPM MB 16M
AL-1551CS
AL-1540CSAL-1215/AL-1530CS
AL-1551CS SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specifications
2. Operation specifications
ItemType DesktopCopy system Dry, electrostaticSegment (class) Digital personal copierCopier dimensions AL-1215 20.4"(W)X18.2"(D)X11.6"(H) (518mm(W)X462.5mm(D)X295.6mm(H))
AL-1530CS 20.4"(W)X18.2"(D)X11.6"(H) (518mm(W)X462.5mm(D)X295.6mm(H))AL-1540CS 20.4"(W)X19.4"(D)X15.0"(H) (518mm(W)X492.5mm(D)X380.4mm(H))AL-1551CS 20.4"(W)X19.4"(D)X18.3"(H) (518mm(W)X492.5mm(D)X465.4mm(H))
Weight (Approximately)
AL-1215 35.3lbs.(17Kg) TD and drum cartridges includedAL-1530CS 35.3lbs.(17Kg)AL-1540CS 41.9lbs.(20Kg)AL-1551CS 50.7lbs.(24Kg)
Section, item DetailsPaper feed section
Paper feed system
AL-1215/1530CS/1540CS 1 tray (250 sheet) + single bypassAL-1551CS 2 tray (500 sheet) + multi bypass (50 sheet)
AB system Tray paper feed section
Paper size A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)Paper weight 56 - 80g/m2 (15 - 21 lbs.)Paper feed capacity 250 sheetsKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paperRemark User adjustment of paper guide available
Multi bypass paper feed section
Paper size A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape)Paper weight 52 - 128g/m2 (14 - 34.5 lbs.)Paper feed capacity 50 sheetsKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, (Single copy)Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Single bypass paper feed section
Paper size A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape)Paper weight 52 - 128g/m2 (14 - 34.5 lbs.)Paper feed capacity 1 sheetKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Postal card, Envelop, Post card (Including double postal without fold line)
Remark User adjustment of paper guide availableInch system Tray paper feed
sectionPaper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)Paper weight 15 - 21 lbs.Paper feed capacity 250 sheetsKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paperRemark User adjustment of paper guide available
Multi bypass paper feed section
Paper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)
Paper weight 14 - 34.5 lbs.Paper feed capacity 50 sheetsKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Single bypass paper feed section
Paper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)Paper weight 14 - 34.5 lbs.Paper feed capacity 1 sheetKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, EnvelopRemark User adjustment of paper guide available
Paper exit section Exit way Face downCapacity of output tray 100 sheets
Originals Original set Center Registration (left edge)Max. original size A4 (8-1/2" x 14")Original kinds sheet, bookOriginal size detection None
AL-1551CS SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2
*1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage.
Optical section Scanning section
Scanning system 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lampCCD sensor Resolution 600 dpiLighting lamp Type CCFL
Voltage 560VrmsPower consumption 2.8W
Output data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bitWriting section
Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laserLaser unit Resolution 600 dpi
Image forming Photoconductor type OPC (30ø)Life 18k
Charger Charging system Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge
Transfer system (+) DC scorotron systemSeparation system (-) DC scorotron system
Developing Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development systemCleaning Cleaning system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
Fusing section Fusing system Heat roller systemUpper heat roller type Teflon rollerLower heat roller type Silicon rubber rollerHeater lamp type Halogen lamp
Voltage 100VPower consumption 800W
Electrical section Power source Voltage 100V, 110V, 120/127V, 230V, 240VFrequency Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Power consumption Max. Less than 1000WAverage (during copying)
AL-1215 300 Wh/H *1)AL-1530CS 300 Wh/H *1)AL-1540CS 300 Wh/H *1)AL-1551CS 310 Wh/H *1)
Average (stand-by) ~ 127V 80Wh/H *1), 230V, 240V 75Wh/H *1)Pre-heat mode ~ 127V 16.5Wh/H *1), 230V, 240V 18Wh/H *1)Auto power shut-off mode ~ 127V 80Wh/H *1), 230V, 240V 75Wh/H *1)
Section, item Details
AL-1551CS SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3
3. Copy performanceSection, item Details AL-1215 AL-1530CS AL-1540CS AL-1551CS
Copy magnification Fixed magnification ratios
3 Reduction + 2 Enlargement (AB system : 25, 70, 86, 100, 141, 400%) (Inch system : 25, 64, 78, 100, 129, 400%)
Zooming magnification ratios
25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments)
Manual steps (manual, photo)
5 steps
Copy speed First copy time Tray paper feed 9.6 sec. (Pre-heat mode:25 sec. / Auto power-shut-off mode : 40 sec.) A4 or Letter/100%/Auto Exposure
AB systemA4(Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 12 15 15 15Enlargement 12 15 15 15Reduction 12 15 15 15
AB systemB5(Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 12 15 15 15Enlargement 12 15 15 15Reduction 12 15 15 15
Inch system8-1/2" x 14"(Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 12 12 12 12Enlargement 12 12 12 12Reduction 12 12 12 12
Inch system8-1/2" x 11"(Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 12 15 15 15Enlargement 12 15 15 15Reduction 12 15 15 15
Max. continuous copy quantity 99Void Void area leading edge 1 - 4mm
Trailing edge 4mm or less, 6mm or less (Duplex copying/both image)Side edge void area 0.5mm or more (per side)
4.5mm or less (total of both sides)Image loss leading edge same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex)
Enlarge: 2mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex) Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex)
Warm-up time 0 sec.Power save mode reset time 0 sec.Paper jam recovery time 0 sec.
AL-1551CS SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 4
4. GDI Printer
*1: Engine Resolution*2: By running change
5. Scan function
* Since only XP is subject to WHQL, XP will be supported to obtain WHQL.
6. SPF
7. RSPF
Print speed Max. 12ppm (A4, 8.5" x 11") (Mono CW chart / Pentium III 733Mhz / 128MB / Win 98)First print time 9.6 sec. (without data transfer time)Duplex YesCPU NoneMemory 8MB (Duplex model: 16MB)Interface IEEE1284 / USB 1.1Emulation GDIResolution 600dpi *1Supported OS Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XPWHQL support Yes *2
Type Flat Bed Color ScannerScanning system Original table/SPF/RSPF (Valid only in the single mode)Light source 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL)Resolution Optical: 600 x 1200dpi
Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)Originals Sheet type / Book typeOutput data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bitScan range OC / SPF: 8.52 (H) x 14.72 (V)"
Original position: Left CenterScan speed OC / SPF: Max. 2.88ms/line (Color/Gray scale), Max. 0.96 ms/line (B & W)Protocol TWAIN / WIA (Only XP)* / STIInterface USB1.1Scanner utility Button Manager / Sharpdesk / ComposerScan key/lamp YesDuplex scan NoSupported OS Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XPVoid area No (User settable by PC)WHQL supported Yes *
Original capacity 30 sheets (52 to 90g/m2)(14 to 23.9 lbs.)Original size A4 to A5/10" x 14" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Original replacement speed 12CPM(A4/8-1/2" x 11"Landscape)(15CPM model)Original placement Face upOriginal weight 52 to 90g/m2(14 - 23.9lbs.)Mixed feeding(Paper size) Performance DegradedOriginal which cannot Thermal papers, originals with punch holes for files, be used folded paper, transparent originals such as OHP films,
stapled or clip used originals with cover up liquid used, Originals with tape sealed, originals with high level frictional coefficient such as photos or catalogs.
Original capacity 30 sheets (52 to 90g/m2)(14 to 23.9 lbs.)Original size A4 to A5/10" x 14" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"Original replacement speed 12CPM(A4/8-1/2" x 11"Landscape)(15CPM model)Job speed(Tray1,Landscape) Single copy S to S 12CPM
S to D 5.6CPMD to S 5.5CPMD to D 5.2CPM
Multi copy S to S 15CPMD to S 15CPM
Original placement Face upOriginal weight 52 to 90g/m2(14 - 23.9lbs.)Mixed feeding(Paper size) Performance DegradedOriginal which cannot Thermal papers, originals with punch holes for files, be used folded paper, transparent
originals such as OHP films, stapled or clip used originals with cover up liquid used, Originals with tape sealed, originals with high level frictional coefficient such as photos or catalogs.
AL-1551CS CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table Common to all destinations
2. EnvironmentalThe environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows:
(1) Normal operating condition
Temperature:20 - 25°CHumidity:65 ± 5%RH
(2) Acceptable operating condition
(3) Optical condition
(4) Supply storage condition
No. Name Content Life Product name Package
1 Develop cartridge (Black) x 1(Except Europe)
Toner/developer cartridge x 1(Toner: Net weight 220g)(Developer: Net weight 190g)
6K(5% document)
AL-100TD 5
2 Develop cartridge (Black) x 1(Except Europe)
Toner/developer cartridge x 1(Toner: Net weight 124g)(Developer: Net weight 190g)
4K(5% document)
AL-110TD 5
3 Develop cartridge (Black) x 1(Europe)
Toner/developer cartridge x 1(Toner: Net weight 124g)(Developer: Net weight 190g)
4K(5% document)
AL-110DC 5
4 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge 18K AL-100DR 5
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
10˚C 30˚C 35˚C
Humidity (RH)
90%
60%
15%
–25˚C 30˚C 40˚C
Humidity (RH)
90%
20%
–5˚C 45˚C
AL-1551CS CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2
3. Production control number(lot No.) identification
<Developing cartridge>
* Destination
<Drum cartridge>
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.(SOCC production)
<JAPAN production>
*1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of aChina product.
Division No.
EX Destination A same pack G
B same pack H
Option Destination A P
B Q
Division No.
Ex production 1
Option 2
Same pack 3
Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
X000119Ver.A 1
Production month
(1 - 9 = Jan. - Sep. 0 = Oct. X = Nov. Y = Dec.)
Serial number of month
Fixed to 1.
Pack division
(See table below)
End digit of year
Version No.
Production controllabel attachment position
Production controllabel attachment position(*1)
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance
*1 SPF only *2 RSPF only
2. Internal
1 Original cover 2 Side cover 3 Bypass tray4 Bypass tray guides 5 Side cover open button 6 Front cover7 Paper tray 8 Operation panel 9 Original table10 Document feeder tray 11 SPF exit area *1 / RSPF exit area *2 12 Original guides13 Feeding roller cover 14 USB interface 15 Parallel interface16 Paper output tray 17 Paper output tray extension 18 Power switch19 Handle 20 Power cord
Interface
SPF/RSPF
8
6
7
9
11
12
13
10
2
1 14
15
4
3
5
1617
181920
Single bypass
4
1 TD cartridge lock release button 2 TD cartridge 3 Drum cartridge4 Drum cartridge handle 5 Fusing unit release lever 6 Charger cleaner7 Transfer charger
57
6
1
24
3
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2
3. Operation panel
*1. Photoreceptor Cartridge Replacement indicator
After making 17,000 copies, the indicator will be “ON”, and after1,000 copier more are made, the indicator starts blinking andmachine will hard-stop (after current job) until a new cartridge isinstalled. End life of photoreceptor cartridge displays 3-digits x 2-line (total 6-digits) by pressing CLEAR key for five seconds in usersimulation.
*2. Toner Developer Cartridge Replacement
When toner density is lower than a specified level, the TONERDEVELOPER CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT indicator lights up towarn the user. If the Toner Developer Cartridge is not replaced inthat time, the Ready Lamp changes to blinking and then start tosupply the toner after around 10 copies. (Cartridge replacementlamp continues to light.) If toner density is not back to specific levelafter two minutes, the READY indicator goes out and Toner Devel-oper indicator starts blinking, and the copier stops.
*3. Indicators on the operation panel
The ON LINE indicator and the start ( ) indicator indicate thestate of the printer or scanner.
Start indicator
(AL-1551CS)
13 14 15 16 17 18
1 Duplex Mode select key and indicator(RSPF only)
2 Exposure mode selector key and indicatorsUse to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO, MANUAL or PHOTO. Selected mode is shown by a lit indicator.
3 Light and dark keys and exposure indicatorsUse to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level.Selected exposure level is shown by a lit indicator.Use to start and terminate user program setting.
4 Alarm indicatorsDrum replacement required indicator *1Misfeed indicatorTD cartridge replacement required indicator *2
5 SPF/RSPF indicator 6 SPF misfeed indicator7 Copy ratio selector key and copy ratio indicators
Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement copy ratios.Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator.
8 Copy ratio display (%) key
9 DisplayDisplays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, user program code, and error code.
10 SCANNER key and indicator *3, *4
11 ON LINE key / indicatorLights up when the machine is used as a printer and scanner. *3
12 Power save indicatorLights up when the copier is in a power save mode.
13 Paper feed location indicatorsLight up to show the selected paper feed station.
14 Tray select keyUse to select a paper feed station (paper tray or bypass tray).
15 Zoom keys / indicatorUse to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.
16 Copy quantity keys• Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
• Use to make user program entries.17 Clear key
• Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run to terminatecopying.
• Press and hold down during standby to display the total number ofcopies made to date.
18 Print key and ready indicator• Copying is possible when the indicator is on.
• Use to set a user program.
• Press to start copying
On: Indicates the unit is ready for copying or scanning is being performed.
Blinking: Indicates that an interrupt print job is in progress, or that the unit is initializing (the cover has been opened and closed or the power turned off and on).
Off: Indicates copying or scanning is being performed or the unit is in the auto power shut-off mode.
Power save indicatorStart indicator
ON LINE indicatorSCANNER indicator
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3
ON LINE indicator
The ON LINE key is pressed and on line and off line are changed.
Power save indicator
Scanner indicator
*4. Using the SCANNER key to begin scanning
This scanning method can only be used if the Button Manager hasbeen installed using the installer. To scan using this method, youmust first complete the settings in Button Manager in your com-puter. For more information on Button Manager, see the onlinemanual or the help file for Button Manager.
Note:
• Scanning is not possible during a copy job.
• If the unit is used to begin a scan job during a print job using theparallel interface connection or the USB interface connection,the scan job will be stored and scanning will begin when the printjob is completed.
• When scanning an original that has been placed in the SPF/RSPF, only one original can be placed unless you are usingSharpdesk.
1) Press the SCANNER ( ) key.
The unit enters scan mode.
2) Place the original you wish to scan on the original table/SPF/RSPF.
For the procedure for placing the original, see "ORIGINALPLACEMENT".
3) Press the right copy quantity key to display the number of theapplication that you wish to use for scanning.
The application numbers are initially as follows.
The application numbers are initially as follows.
4) Press the start ( ) key.
The selected application launches and scanning begins.
On: Indicates the unit is ready for printing or scanning is being performed. (On line)
Blinking: Printing or data is being received from a computer.
Off: Copying is being performed. (Off line)
On: Indicates the unit is in a power save mode.
On: The SCANNER ( ) key has been pressed and the unit is in scanner mode.
Blinking: A scan job is being executed from the computer, or scan data is stored in the unit's memory.
Off: The unit is in the copy mode.
Application number
Application launched
SC1 Sharpdesk (if installed)SC2 E-mail (your standard e-mail program in the
Windows OS you are using)SC3 Fax (if a fax program is installed)SC4 OCR (if an OCR program is installed)SC5 Microsoft Word (if installed)SC6 Any application set in Button Manager
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4
4. Motors and solenoids
3
9
2
8
10
4
1
5
7
11
6
No. Part name Control signal Function / Operation1 Main motor MM Drives the copier.2 Scanner motor MRMT Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).3 Toner motor TM Supplies toner.4 Cooling fan motor VFM Cools the optical section.5 Resist roller solenoid RRS Resist roller rotation control solenoid6 Paper feed solenoid CPFS1 Cassette Paper feed solenoid 17 Multi paper feed solenoid MPFS Multi manual pages feed solenoid 8 SPF motor SPFM Drives the single pass feeder9 Duplex motor DMT Devices the duplex paper transport section10 Original feed solenoid SPUS Original feed solenoid11 Paper feed solenoid CPFS2 Cassette Paper feed solenoid 2
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5
5. Sensors and switches
1 211
9
10
3
4
12
5
6
137
8
No. Name Signal Type Function Output1 Scanner unit home position
sensorMHPS Transmission sensor Scanner unit home position detection "H" at home position
2 POD sensor POD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection "H" at paper pass3 PPD2 sensor PPD2 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 2 "L" at paper pass4 Cassette detection switch CED1 Micro-switch Cassette installation detection "H" at cassette insertion5 Manual feed detection
switchMFD Transmission sensor Manual feed paper detection
(single only)"L" at paper detection
6 PPD1 sensor PPD1 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 1 "L" at paper pass7 Door switch DSW Micro-switch Door open/close detection
(safety switch for 24V)1 or 0V of 24V at door open
8 Drum reset switch DRST Micro-switch New drum detection switch Instantaneously "H" at insertion of new drum
9 SPF sensor SPID/SD SW
Transmission sensor Paper entry detectionCover open/close detection
"L" at paper pass
10 SPPD sensor SPPD Transmission sensor Paper transport detection "L" at paper pass11 SDOD sensor SDOD Transmission sensor SPF open/close detection Book
sensor"L" at paper pass
12 2nd cassette DSW Micro-switch 2nd cassette door open detection 1 or 0V of 5V at door open13 PPD3 sensor PPD3 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 3 "L" at paper pass
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6
6. PWB unit
2
4
5
1
8
3
6
7
9
No. Name Function1 Exposure lamp invertor PWB Exposure lamp (CCFL) control2 Main PWB (MCU) Copier control3 Operation PWB Operation input/display4 Power PWB AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control5 CCD sensor PWB For image scanning6 LSU motor PWB For polygon motor drive7 TCS PWB For toner sensor control8 LSU PWB For laser control9 I/F PWB Scanner/GDI Printer control (parallel I/F, USB I/F)
AL-1551CS EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 7
7. Cross sectional view
3
4
518
8
9
10
11
6
7
121314
1
2
15 16
17
No. Part name Function and operation
1 Scanner unit Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit(CCD).
2 Exposure lamp Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original
3 LSU (Laser unit) Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
4 Paper exit roller Roller for paper exit
5 Main charger Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
6 Heat roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
7 Pressure roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
8 Drum Forms images.
9 Transfer unit Transfers images onto the drum.
10 Pickup roller Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
11 Manual paper feed tray Tray for manual feed paper
12 Manual paper feed roller Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
13 PS roller unit Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
14 Paper feed roller Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
15 Pickup roller Picks up documents.
16 Separation roller Separates documents to feed properly.
17 PS roller Feeds documents to the scanning section.
18 Paper exit roller Discharges documents.
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Copier installationImproper installation may damage the copier. Please note the followingduring initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, con-densation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condi-tion will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hoursbefore use.
Do not install your copier in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight
• poorly ventilated
• subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near anair conditioner or heater.
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easyconnection.
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meetsthe specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicingand proper ventilation.
2. Cautions on handlingBe careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the perfor-mance of this copier.
Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against anyobject.
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.
Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge,causing poor print quality.
Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TD cartridges in adark place without removing from the package before use.
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor printquality.
3. Checking packed components and accessories
Open the carton and check if the following components and accesso-ries are included.
8"(20cm)8" (20cm)
4"(10cm)
4"(10cm)
Drum cartridge (installed in unit)
Operation manual
AL-1530CS/AL-1540CS/AL-1551CS
Software CD-ROM
TD cartridge
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2
4. UnpackingBe sure to hold the handles on both sides of the copier to unpack thecopier and carry it to the installation location.
5. Removing protective packing materials1) Remove pieces of tape and protective cover. Then open the origi-
nal cover and remove protective materials (a) and (b).
2) Release the scan head locking switch.
6. Installing the TD cartridgeThe TD cartridge replacement required ( ) indicator will light upwhen toner is needed. If copying is continued while the indicator islit, copies will gradually become lighter until the copier stops and theindicator begins blinking. Replace the old TD cartridge by following theprocedure given below.
Note:
• After the copier stops, it may be possible to make a few more copiesby taking the TD cartridge out of the copier, shaking it horizontally,then reinstalling it. If copying is not possible after this operation,replace the TD cartridge.
• During long copy run of a dark original, the ready ( ) indicator mayblink, the indicator may light up, and the copier may stop, eventhough toner cartridge is not empty. The copier will feed toner up to 2minutes and then the ready ( ) indicator will light up. Press theprint ( ) key to restart copying.
1) Ensure that the bypass tray is open and then open the side coverby pressing the open button on the side cover.
2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove thetwo protective pins from the fusing unit by pulling the stringsupward one at a time.
3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open the cover.
4) Remove the TD cartridge from the bag. Remove the protectivepaper. Hold the cartridge on both sides and shake it horizontallyfour or five times.
AL-1551CS
AL-1540CS
(AL-1551CS only)
AL-1215/AL-1530CS
AL-1540CS/AL-1551CS
AL-1215/AL-1530CS
AL-1540CS/AL-1551CS
Lock Unlock
Grasp here and turn in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION tape
Protective pins
4 or 5 times
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3
5) Hold the tab of the protective cover and pull the tab to remove thecover.
6) Gently insert the TD cartridge until it locks in place.
7) Close the front cover and then the side cover by pressing theround projections near the side cover open button. The indica-tor will go out and the ready ( ) indicator will light up.
Note: When closing the covers, be sure to close the front coversecurely and then close the side cover. If the covers are closedin the wrong order, the covers may be damaged.
7. Loading copy paperNote: This copier is equipped with two paper trays. Load copy paper
into the two paper trays.1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until
it stops.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock inthe direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down thepressure plate of the paper tray.
3) Store the pressure plate lock that was removed in step 2 and thescrew that was removed when unpacking the machine in the frontof the paper tray. To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lockto fix it on the relevant location.
4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper widthand length.Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and slide the guide to matchwith the width of the paper.Move paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on thetray.
5) Fan the copy paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the edgesgo under the corner hooks.
Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ).Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the copier.
Note: After loading copy paper, to cancel the blinking "H" withoutrestarting copying, press the clear ( ) key. The "P" in thedisplay will go out and the ready ( ) indicator will light up.
8. Power to copier1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position.
Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at therear of the copier.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.
9. Software for the AL-1200(USB) seriesThe supplied CD-ROM includes software for this unit.
MFP driverScanner driver
Permits you to operate scanning function of this unit with TWAIN-com-pliant and WIA-compliant application.
Printer driver
Enables you to use the printer function of this unit with your computer.
Print Status Window
The print state and information on current printing are displayed on thestatus monitor window.
SharpdeskAn integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage doc-ument and image files and launch applications.
Button ManagerButton Manager enabling the SCANNER key located on the unit.
Paper guide (B)
Paper guide (A)
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4
(Hardware and software requirements)Check the following hardware and software requirements in order toinstall the software.
*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Profes-sional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Editionpreinstalled model with USB interface equipped as standard.
*2: Printing is unavailable in MS-DOS mode.
*3: The administrator's authorization is required to install this softwareusing this installer.
(Before installation)The following table shows the drivers and software that can beinstalled for each version of Windows and interface connectionmethod.
*1: When the unit is connected through the parallel port, the Print Sta-tus Window can only be used when the parallel port is set to ECPmode. To set the parallel port mode, refer to your computer manualor ask the manufacturer of your computer.
*2: Sharpdesk can be installed when using a parallel interface connec-tion, however, the unit's scanner function cannot be used.
• If you are using some of your computer's memory as a RAM drive,the printer driver may not be allocated the correct amount of mem-ory. In such a case, reduce the size of your RAM disk, or do not usethe RAM disk. Please refer to your Windows documentation for fur-ther information.
• Is there another GDI printer driver or a Windows Printing Systemprinter driver already installed? If installed, change the printer portsetting. For the change of the printer port setting, see "USINGOTHER INSTALLED DRIVERS".
(Flow of installation)Refer to the following table and then begin installation
(Installing the software)The following term is used in this section.
MFP
Means the unit as a printer and scanner.
• For this description, it is assumed that the mouse is configured forright hand operation.
• To print or scan, the MFP must be in the online state.
• The scanner feature only works when using a USB interface cable.
• If any error message appears, solve the problem following theinstructions on the screen. After your problem is solved, the installingprocedure will be continued. Depending on your problem, you mayhave to exit the installer. In this case, click the "Cancel" button to exitthe installer. After solving your problem, reinstall the software fromthe beginning.
A. Windows XP (USB/parallel interface)Before starting the installation, make sure the USB or parallel interfacecable is not connected to the MFP.
1) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-clickthe CD-ROM icon.
• When any of "Found New Hardware Wizard" messages appearduring the software installation, be sure to click the "Cancel" but-ton.
3) Double-click the "Setup" icon.
If the language selection screen appears after you double click the"Setup" icon, select the language you wish to use and click the"Next" button. (Normally, the correct language is selected automati-cally.)
4) Select the software packages to be installed, and then click the"Next" button.
The software packages with checkmark on the list on the screenwill be installed.
Click the "Display README" button to show the information on theselected package.
Computer type IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB1.1*1 or bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE 1284)
Operating system*2
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (ServicePack 5 or later)*3, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional*3, Windows XP Home Edition*3
Display 800 x 600dots (SVGA) display with 256 colors (or better)
Hard disk free space
150MB or more
Other requirement for hardware
An environment on which any of the operating systems listed above can fully operate
MFP Driver
Button Manager
SharpdeskPrinter driver/
Print Status Window
Scanner driver
Users of Windows 98/Me/2000/XP who will use the USB interface connection
Available*1
Available Available Available
Users of Windows 98/Me/2000/XP who will use the parallel interface connection
Not Available
Not Available
Available*2
Windows 95/NT 4.0 users
Operating system
Interface Reference pages for how to install
Windows XPUSB/
ParallelInstalling onto Windows XP (USB/parallel interface)
Windows 98USB
Installing onto Windows 98/Me/2000 (USB interface)
ParallelInstalling onto Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000 (Parallel interface)
Windows MeUSB
Installing onto Windows 98/Me/2000 (USB interface)
ParallelInstalling onto Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000 (Parallel interface)
Windows 2000
USBInstalling onto Windows 98/Me/2000 (USB interface)
ParallelInstalling onto Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000 (Parallel interface)
Windows 95/NT 4.0
ParallelInstalling onto Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000 (Parallel interface)
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5
• If you are using the parallel interface connection, do not selectthe Button Manager checkbox because this feature is not sup-ported with the parallel interface.
• If the following screen appears, click the "OK" button. Review thecontents in "BEFORE INSTALLATION", and then select onlyappropriate the software packages to be installed.
5) Review the software packages to be installed on the screen, andthen click the "Start" button.
The software packages to be installed will be displayed on thescreen. If inappropriate packages are displayed, click the "Back"button to select appropriate packages again.
6) Copying files for MFP driver installation and parallel interface setup(This step will start if it was selected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome" window, clickthe "Next" button.
2. A dialog box appears asking you to verify that the USB or paral-lel interface cable is not connected to the MFP. Make sure thatthe interface cable is not connected and click the "Next" button.
3. Click the "Next" button in the dialog box to install the MFP driveror Cancel to quit the installation.
The setup program will start to copy the files.If the following screen appears while the files are being copied(the message may appear more than once), click "ContinueAnyway".
4. When the "The MFP driver installation is complete." dialog boxappears, click the "OK" button.
The Button Manager installer will start.
7) Begin installation of the Button Manager (This step will start if it wasselected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome" window, clickthe "Next" button.
2. Read the message in the "Please read the following informa-tion." window, and then click the "Next" button.
3. When a message appears that lets you specify the location forthe software to be installed, click the "Next" button.
4. If the program displays, "Do you want the Button Manageradded to Windows Startup?", check "Yes" and click the "OK"button.
The setup program will start to copy the files.
5. Click the "Finish" button when the message informs you thatsetup is successful.
The Sharpdesk installer will start.
8) Begin installation of the Sharpdesk (This step will start if it wasselected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome to Sharpdeskinstallation" window, click the "Next" button.
2. Read the message in the "Information" window, and then clickthe "Next" button.
3. When the "Choose Destination Location" window appears, clickthe "Next" button.
4. When the "Select Program Folder" window appears, click the"Next" button.
The setup program will start to copy the files.If the dialog box asking "If you have TIFF files saved usingPhoto-Shop or Imaging for Windows you should hit Skip"appears. Answer the question to continue the Sharpdesk instal-lation.
5. Click the "Finish" button when the message informs you thatSetup is complete.
9) Click the "Close" button when the message informs you that "Setuphas finished". When the "Now connect the MFP interface cable tothe PC" dialog box appears, click the "OK" button.
• After the installation, a message to restart your computer may bedisplayed. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your com-puter.
• For parallel interface connection ensure that your computer andMFP are turned off before connecting the cable.
10) Connect the USB interface cable or parallel interface cable (seepage 5-8).
Windows will detect the MFP and the Plug and Play screen willappear. If you are using Windows XP with the parallel interface, goto step 12.
11) Begin installation of the scanner driver.
1. "SHARP AL-xxxx" (where xxxx is the model name of yourMFP) will appear in the "Found New Hardware Wizard" dialogbox. Select "Install the software automatically (Recom-mended)" and click the "Next" button.
2. The "Install hardware" dialog box will appear. Click the "Con-tinue Anyway" button.
3. When installation of the driver is completed, click the "Finish"button to finish the scanner driver installation.
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6
12) Begin installation of the printer driver.
1. "SHARP AL-xxxx" (where xxxx is the model name of yourMFP) will appear in the "Found New Hardware Wizard" dialogbox. Select "Install the software automatically (Recom-mended)" and click the "Next" button.
2. The "Hardware Installation" dialog box will appear. Click the"Continue Anyway" button.
3. When installation of the driver is completed, click the "Finish"button to finish the printer driver installation.
You have completed the installation of all the software.
B. Windows 98/Me/2000 (USB interface)Before starting the installation, make sure the USB interface cable isnot connected to the MFP.
1) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2) Double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROMicon.
• When any of "Hardware Found", or "Found New Hardware Wiz-ard" messages appear during the software installation, be sureto click the "Cancel" button.
3) Double-click the "Setup" icon.
• If the language selection screen appears after you double clickthe "Setup" icon, select the language you wish to use and clickthe "Next" button. (Normally, the correct language is selectedautomatically.)
4) Select the software packages to be installed, and then click the"Next" button.
The software packages with checkmark on the list on the screenwill be installed. Click the "Display README" button to show theinformation on the selected package.
• If the following screen appears, click the "OK" button. Review thecontents in "BEFORE INSTALLATION", and then select theappropriate driver software packages to be installed.
5) Review the software packages to be installed on the screen, andthen click the "Start" button.
The software packages to be installed will be displayed on thescreen. If inappropriate packages are displayed, click the "Back"button to select appropriate packages again.
6) Copying files for MFP driver installation.
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome" window, clickthe "Next" button.
2. A dialog box appears asking you to verify that the interfacecable is not connected to the MFP. Make sure that the interfacecable is not connected and click the "Next" button.
3. Click the "Next" button in the dialog box showing the files to becopied for installation of the MFP driver.
The setup program will start to copy the files.
In Windows 2000, if the following screen appears while the filesare being copied (the message may appear more than once),click "Yes" in Windows 2000.
4. The following screen appears when all of the files for the USBinterface connection have been copied. If you are not using aparallel interface cable for connection to the MFP, please clickthe "No" button.
5. When the "The MFP driver installation is complete." dialog boxappears, click the "OK" button.
The Button Manager installer will start.
7) Begin installation of the Button Manager (This step will start if it wasselected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome" window, clickthe "Next" button.
2. Read the message in the "Please read the following informa-tion." window, and then click the "Next" button.
3. When a message appears that lets you specify the location forthe software to be installed, click the "Next" button.
4. If the program displays, "Do you want to add Button Manager toStartup program?", check "Yes" and click the "OK" button.
The setup program will start to copy the files.
5. Click the "Finish" button when the message to inform you of thecompletion of the installation appears.
The Sharpdesk installer will start.
8) Begin installation of the Sharpdesk (This step will start if it wasselected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome to Sharpdeskinstallation" window, click the "Next" button.
2. Read the message in the "Information" window, and then clickthe "Next" button.
3. When the "Choose Destination Location" window appears, clickthe "Next" button.
4. When the "Select Program Folder" window appears, click the"Next" button.
The setup program will start to copy the files.
If the dialog box asking "If you have TIFF files saved usingPhoto-Shop or Imaging for Windows you should hit Skip"appears. Answer the question to continue the Sharpdesk instal-lation.
5. Click the "Finish" button when the message to inform you of thecompletion of the installation appears.
9) Click the "Close" button when the message to inform you of thecompletion of the installation appears. When the "Now connect theMFP interface cable to the PC. This will finalize the drivers installa-tion and settings." dialog box appears, click the "OK" button.
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7
• After the installation, a message to restart your computer may bedisplayed. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your com-puter.
10) Connect the USB interface cable (see page 5-8).
Windows will detect the MFP and the Plug and Play screen willappear.
11) Follow the instructions in the Plug and Play screen that appears inyour version of Windows to begin the installation.
You have completed the installation of the software.
C. Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000 (Parallel interface)Before starting the installation, make sure the USB or parallel interfacecable is not connected to the MFP.
1) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2) Double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROMicon.
• When any of "Hardware Found", or "Found New Hardware Wiz-ard" messages appear during the software installation, be sureto click the "Cancel" button.
3) Double-click the "Setup" icon.
• If the language selection screen appears after you double clickthe "Setup" icon, select the language you wish to use and clickthe "Next" button. (Normally, the correct language is selectedautomatically.)
4) Select the software packages to be installed, and then click the"Next" button.
The software packages with checkmark on the list on the screenwill be installed.
Click the "Display README" button to show the information on theselected package.
• In Windows 95/NT 4.0, "Button Manager" does not appear. InWindows 98/Me/2000, do not select the "Button Manager"checkbox. because this is not supported when using the parallelinterface.
5) The next screen appears. Make sure that the parallel interfacecable is not connected, and click "OK".
6) Check the contents of the package on the screen, and then clickthe "Start" button.
The software packages to be installed will be displayed on thescreen. If inappropriate packages are displayed, click the "Back"button to select only appropriate software packages.
7) Copying files for MFP driver installation and parallel interface setup(This step will start if it was selected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome" window, clickthe "Next" button.
2. A dialog box appears asking you to verify that the USB or paral-lel interface cable is not connected to the MFP. Make sure thatthe interface cable is not connected and click the "Next" button.
3. Click the "Next" button in the dialog box to install the MFP driveror Cancel to quit the installation.
The setup program will start to copy the files.
In Windows 2000, if the following screen appears while the filesare being copied (the message may appear more than once),click "Yes" in Windows 2000.
4. The following screen appears. Click the "Yes" button, and thenthe Model screen will appear. Select the model number that isthe same as the model name of your MFP and click the "Next"button.
Be sure to select the displayed model number that is the sameas the MFP's model name. If they are not the same, the driverwill not be installed correctly.
5. Establish the printer settings and click the "Next" button.
Select "LPT1" for the port to be used. If "LPT1" does not appear,it is likely that another printer or peripheral device is using"LPT1". Check your other printers and peripheral devices, andchange the port setting as needed so no device is using "LPT1".If you wish the MFP to be your default printer, select "Yes". Ifnot, select "No".
6. When the "Setup has completed gathering all necessary instal-lation information" dialog box appears, click the "Yes" button.
The parallel interface driver is installed.
7. When the "The MFP driver installation is complete." dialog boxappears, click the "OK" button.
The Sharpdesk installer will start.
8) Begin installation of the Sharpdesk (This step will start if it wasselected in step 4).
1. After confirming the message in the "Welcome to Sharpdeskinstallation" window, click the "Next" button.
2. Read the message in the "Information" window, and then clickthe "Next" button.
3. When the "Choose Destination Location" window appears, clickthe "Next" button.
Windows 95/NT 4.0 Windows 98/Me/2000
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8
4. When the "Select Program Folder" window appears, click the"Next" button.
The setup program will start to copy the files.
If the dialog box asking "If you have TIFF files saved usingPhoto-Shop or Imaging for Windows you should hit Skip"appears. Answer the question to continue the Sharpdesk instal-lation.
5. Click the "Finish" button when the message to inform you of thecompletion of the installation appears.
9) Click the "Close" button when the message to inform you of thecompletion of the installation appears.
• After the installation, a message to restart your computer may bedisplayed. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your com-puter.
10) Connect the parallel interface cable.
You have completed the installation of all the software.
• For parallel interface connection ensure that your computer andMFP are turned off before connecting the cable (see page 5-8).
10. Connecting the interface cableThis unit includes both USB and parallel interface connectors.Interface cables for connecting the unit to your computer are notincluded with this unit.
Caution:
• If you intend to use the unit as a scanner, it must be connected toyour computer with a USB interface cable. The scanner function can-not be used if the unit is connected with a parallel cable.
• USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was origi-nally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Win-dows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XPHome Edition preinstalled.
• Do not connect the interface cable before installing the MFP driver.The interface cable should be connected during installa-tion of theMFP driver.
Connecting the USB interface cable1) Obtain a shielded USB interface cable.
2) Insert the cable into the USB interface connector located on therear of the unit.
3) Insert the other end of the cable into the interface connector of yourcomputer, or the USB hub connected to your computer.
Connecting the parallel interface cable1) Obtain an IEEE1284 shielded parallel interface cable.
2) Ensure that your computer and unit are turned off.
3) Insert the cable into the parallel interface connector located on therear of the unit, and fasten with clasps.
4) Insert the other end of the cable into the interface connector of yourcomputer.
11. Parallel interfaceThis printer uses a bi-directional parallel interface. Use the suppliedinterface cable.
Connector36-pin ACON RBE42-36K1153 female connector or equivalent con-nector
CableShielded type bi-directional parallel interface For best results, use aprinter interface cable which is IEEE1284 compliant.
Pin configurationThe pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name1 STB 19 GND (STB RET)2 DATA1 20 GND (DATA1 RET)3 DATA2 21 GND (DATA2 RET)4 DATA3 22 GND (DATA3 RET)5 DATA4 23 GND (DATA4 RET)6 DATA5 24 GND (DATA5 RET)7 DATA6 25 GND (DATA6 RET)8 DATA7 26 GND (DATA7 RET)9 DATA8 27 GND (DATA8 RET)
10 ACKNLG 28 GND (ACKNLG RET)
11 BUSY 29 GND (BUSY RET)12 PE (Paper End) 30 GND (PE RET)13 SLTC 31 INPRM14 AUTO LF 32 FAULT15 (NC) 33 (NC)16 GND (0 V) 34 (NC)17 FG 35 +5 V18 +5 V 36 SLTC IN
118
36 19
AL-1551CS UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9
12. USB interface
Connector4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200
Type-B connector
CableShielded twisted pair cable
(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)
Pin configurationThe pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
13. Moving
Moving instructionsWhen moving the unit, follow the procedure below.
Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the TD cartridge inadvance.
1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the out-let.
2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the TDcartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order.
To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to removethe TD cartridge, see "TD CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT".
3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until itstops.
4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in placeand lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has beenstored in the front of the paper tray.
5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.
6) Lock the scan head locking switch.
Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must belocked to prevent shipping damage.
7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,and attach the packing materials and tape which were removedduring installation of the unit. See "PREPARING THE UNIT FORINSTALLATION".
8) Pack the unit into the carton. See "CHECKING PACKED COMPO-NENTS AND ACCESSORIES".
Pin No. Signal name1 +5V2 -DATA3 +DATA4 GND
12
3 4
AL-1551CS COPY PROCESS 6 - 1
[6] COPY PROCESS
1. Functional diagram
(Basic operation cycle)
(20 microns thick)
Aluminum drum
Pigment layer (0.2to 0.3 microns thick)
An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.(Structure of the OPC drum layers)
OPC layer
Main charger
Laser beam
MG roller
Cleaning blade
Drum
Transfer unit
Resist roller
ExposureMain high voltage unit
Saw tooth Charge
Drum
CleaningCleaning blade
Waste toner box
Paper release Fusing Separation
Heat roller
Heater lamp
Transfer
Transfer charger
Transfer highvoltage unit
Developing
Toner
Developer
Print process
Paper transport route
Semiconductor laser
Manual feed
PS roller
Focus correction lens
Electrode
Synchronizationwith drum
Cassettepaper feed
To facedown tray
AL-1551CS COPY PROCESS 6 - 2
2. Outline of print processThis printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laserand electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (OrganicPhoto Conductor) for its photoconductive material.First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface anda latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. Thislatent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner isapplied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by thetransfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section witha combination of heat and pressure.
Step-1: ChargeStep-2: Exposure* Latent image is formed on the drum.Step-3: Developing
Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visibleimage with toner.
Step-4: TransferThe visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferredonto the print paper.
Step-5: CleaningResidual toner on the drum surface is removed and collectedby the cleaning blade.
Step-6: Optical dischargeResidual charge on the drum surface is removed, bysemiconductor laser beam.
3. Actual print processStep-1: DC charge
A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface bythe main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of theScorotron charger. Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.
Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)
A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser andcontrolled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPCdrum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance ofthe OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam(corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes thenegative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drumsurface.
AboutDC5.5KV
( 580V/ 400V)
OPC layerPigmentlayerAluminumdrum
OPC layerPigmentlayerAluminumlayer
Drum surface chargeafter the exposure
Non-image area Image area
Semiconductor laser
Exposure(semiconductor laser)
AL-1551CS COPY PROCESS 6 - 3
Step-3: Developing (DC bias)
A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two componentmagnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negativethrough friction with the carrier.Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potentialrepel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negativecharges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears onthe drum surface.
Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developingbias.
Step-4: Transfer
The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the printpaper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to thebackside of the print paper.
Step-5: Separation
Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it isdischarged by the separation corona. The separation corona isconnected to ground.
Step-6: Cleaning
Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaningblade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in thecleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.
S
N
N
:Carrier (Magnetized particle):Toner (Charge negative by friction)(N) (S) Permanent magnet
(provided in three locations)
MG roller
DC400V 8V
About DC 5.2kV
AL-1551CS COPY PROCESS 6 - 4
Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser)
Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser isradiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPClayer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to thedrum surface for the next page to be printed.When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on thealuminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges onthe OPC layer.
Charge by the Scorotron charger
Function
The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potentialon the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless ofthe charge characteristics of the photoconductor.
Basic function
A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and thephotoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid tomaintain the corona current on the photoconductor.As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the maincorona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the currentflowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potentialnears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that thephotoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level.
Process controlling
Function
The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by thesemiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developingmethod. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum ischarged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is notadded when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drumbecause of the strong electrostatic force of the drum.To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potentialand the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.
Basic function
Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. Tomake it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition atthe developer unit.
Start
1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is atabout -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier ispulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V.
2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductorpotential is switched from LOW to HIGH.
3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductorpotential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum.
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place.Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence
Function
The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removedduring print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abatesand the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong staticpower. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retainthe developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltagegradually against possible power loss.
Basic function
Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain timebefore the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stopbefore completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can beadded before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption.Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface.
Semiconductor laser
0START STOP
Print potential
Toner attractpotential
2)
3)
1) Low
4) High Drum potential
Developing bias
Time
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operationThe outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
(Outline of copy operation)Setting conditions
1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy densitywith the operation section, and press the COPY button. Theinformation on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.
Image scanning
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section startsscanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document andpassed through the lens to the CCD.
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion
3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuitand passed to the MCU.
Image process
4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processedunder the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) asprint data.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion
5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror andvarious lenses to the OPC drum.
Printing
7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum accordingto the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to bevisible images(toner images).
8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section insynchronization with the image lead edge.
9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner imagesare fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper isdischarged onto the exit tray.
(Outline of printer operation)The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and theMCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5)and later.
(Outline of scanner operation)The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PCaccording to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the opera-tions with the operation panel.
Operationsection
Scanner section
CCD
MCU (Main control/image process section) Printer/Scanner I/F USB or Parallel
PC
Note: The scanner function is effectiveonly by USB connection.
Laser beamPaper exit
Fusing section
Paper transport section
Manual paperfeed section
Cassette paperfeed section
Printer section
LSU (Laser unit)Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens
Process section
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2
2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unitThe scanner unit in the digital copier scans images.
It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unitperforms scanning in the main scan direction with the light receivingelements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the subscanning direction by moving the optical unit.
B. Optical systemTwo white lamps are used as the light source.
Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on thedocument table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 5times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens toform images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line CCD.
The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 linescanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each colorsection are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scan-ning)
The resolution is 600dpi.
When copying, only the green component is used to print with theprinter.
The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by theservice simulation.
(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)
(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
(Optical unit)
C. Drive systemThe drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear,the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft.
The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of thebelt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and theidle pulley to drive the optical unit.
MBVM26W25W260NLH/G
0.00E+00
1.00E-01
2.00E-01
3.00E-01
4.00E-01
5.00E-01
6.00E-01
0 200 400 600 800Wave length (nm)
Inte
nsity
of U
V
Lamp : MBVM26W25W260NLH/GLamp current : 5mATemp. : 25 degree
1 Table glass 2 Optical unit 3 Lens4 Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 37 CCD PWB 8 Lamp 9 Reflector
1
98
10 8
9
7
35 4
2
6
1 Scanner motor 2 Pulley gear 3 Idle pulley4 Belt 473 5 Belt 190 6 Optical unit7 Shaft 8 Idle gear 9
7
3 4 6 2 8 5
1
3
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3
3. Laser unitThe image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent tothe LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
A. Basic structureThe LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images areformed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc.
The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindricallens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images onthe OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWBis provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluc-tuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement ofthe laser writing start point.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same aseach other.
B. Laser beam path
C. CompositionEffective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the subscanning direction
Image surface power: 0.17 ±0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 - 795nm)
Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpmNo. of mirror surfaces: 6 surfaces
4. Fuser section
No Component Function
1 Semiconductor laser Generates laser beams.
2 Collimator lens Converges laser beams in parallel.3 Polygon mirror,
polygon motorReflects laser beams at a constant rpm.
4 BD (Mirror, lens, PWB) Detects start timing of laser scanning.5 fθ lens Converges laser beams at a spot on the
drum.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.)
1 2 3
4 5
a ≠ b ≠ ca b c
d = e = fd e f
fθ LENS
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4
A. General descriptionGeneral block diagram (cross section)
Top view
(1) Heat rollerA Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller isused for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance andpaper separation.
(2) Separator pawlThree separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separa-tor pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and preventa smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
(3) Thermal control1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB,
and triac within the power supply unit are used to control thetemperature in the fuser unit.To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, athermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.
2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165 -190°C. The surface temperature during the power save mode isset to 100°C.
3) The self-check function comes active when one of the followingmalfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopywindow.
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240°C.
b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100°C duringthe copy cycle.
c. Open thermistor
d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190°C within 27second after supplying the power.
(4) Fusing resistorFusing resistor
This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section toimprove transfer efficiency.
Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper thatcontains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and thefusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground viathe copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section
A. Paper transport path and general operations
Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manualpaper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250sheets.
The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray fromthe front cabinet.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paperfeed operation are given below.
Separator pawl
PPD2
Thermal fuse
Thermistor
Heat roller
Paper guide
Pressure roller
Heat rollerThermistor
Thermal fuse
Heater lamp
Separator pawl
Safety device(thermal breaker, thermalfuse)
Triac (in thepower supply unit)
Heated by the heater lamp. (950W)
The surface temperatureof the upper heat roller issensed by the thermistor.
Level of the thermistor iscontrolled by the main PWB.
With the signal from themain PWB, the triac iscontrolled on and off.(power supply PWB)
1 Scanner unit 8 Drum2 Copy lamp 9 Transfer unit
3 LSU (Laser unit) 10 Pickup roller
4 Paper exit roller 11 Manual paper feed tray
5 Main charger 12 Manual paper feed roller
6 Heat roller 13 PS roller unit
7 Pressure roller 14 Paper feed roller
1
54 3
7
6
89
11121314
10
2
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5
(1) Cassette paper feed operation1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the
paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initialstate without pressing the COPY button after lighting the readylamp.The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutchsleeve.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor startsrotating to drive each drive gear.The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however,the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutchsleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-uproller, which does not rotate therefore.
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, thetray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment.This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of theclutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to thepaper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feedlatch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve,stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detectionswitch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec fromdetection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS)turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contactwith the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of thepaper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing againstskew feeding.
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and theresist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengagethe resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation ofthe resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper istransported by the resist roller.
7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed throughthe pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images aretransferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drumby the drum curve and the separation section.
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusingpaper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper outdetector) to the copy tray.
OFF
PFS
OFF
RRS
OFF
PFS
OFF
RRS
ON
PFS
OFF
RRS
OFF
PFS
ON
RRS
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6
(2) Manual multi paper feed operation1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid
(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feedsolenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feedlatch.A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manualpaper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time,the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-uproller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engagedwith the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and themanual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feedroller is rotating.
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resistroller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarilyto allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on theOPC drum.From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feedoperation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.)
5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initialstate.
OFMPFS
F
C A
ON
MPFS
A
C
ON
MPFS
A
C
OF
MPFS
F
A
C
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7
(3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeeda. When the power is turned on:
PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
b. Copy operation
6. Process unit new drum detection mechanism
1) When the power is turned on, the detection gear 38T is rotated inthe arrow direction by the detection gear 20T to push the micro-switch (process detection switch) installed to the machine sensorcover, making a judgement as a new drum.
2) When the detection gear 38T turns one rotation, there is no gearany more and it stops.The latch section of the 38T gear is latched and fixed with theprojection of the process cover.
7. SPF section
A. OutlineThe SPF (Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AL-1540CS as a stan-dard provision, and it automatically copies up to 30 sheets of docu-ments of a same size. (Only one set of copies)
B. Document transport path and basic composition
a PPD1 jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning on the resist roller.
b PPD2 jam PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller.
PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller.
c POD jam POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller.
POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.
Gear 20T
Process detection switch
Gear 38T
1 Pickup roller 2 Sheet of document for paper feed
3 Set detection ACT 4 Paper stopper5 Document feed roller 6 Separation sheet7 Paper entry sensor 8 PS roller D9 Transport follower roller 10 Paper exit roller
11 Paper exit follower roller 12 Document tray
Gear notch
Gear pawl
Projection
Gear notch
Gear pawl
Projection
213 4 56
7
89
1011
12
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8
C. Operational descriptions
D. Cases where a document jam is caused1) When SPPD is ON (document remaining) when the power is
turned on.
2) When SPPD is not turned ON within about 1.5 sec (at 100% copy)after starting the document feed operation.
3) When SPPD is not turned on within about 4.7 sec (at 100% copy)after turning on SPPD.
4) When the SPF document jam release door or the OC cover isopened during document transport (SPF motor rotating).
8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (Duplex model)
A. Initial stateSet duplex documents on the document tray.
Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed traycannot be selected.)
B. Front copyDocument transport:
The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feedroller to the PS roller.
• The document is exposed in the exposure section, and sent to thedocument exit section
• by the transport/paper exit roller.
• R-SPF gate solenoid ON
• The document is sent to the intermediate tray.(but not discharged completely.)
• The document is stopped once, then switchback operation isperformed. (To the back copy)
Paper transport:
The document is passed through the paper feed roller and the PSroller by the paper feed roller
and the images on the front surface are transferred.
• The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side ofthe gate section to the paper exit tray side, (but not dischargedcompletely.)
• It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed.(To the back copy)
SPID ON
PSW ON
MIRM rotation
MM rotation
CPFS ON
SPFM rotation
SPUS ON
Document set
Document set sensor
Document feed unit lamp ON
PPD ON
RRC ON SPPD ON
POD ON
Copy start
The scanner is shiftedto the exposure position.
(Copier side)
Main motor rotation
Paper feed
Synchronization
(Transfer)
(Fusing) (Document exit)
Paper transport
(Exposure)
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjustedby changing the document transport speed.
(Paper exit)
SPF motor rotation
Document feed
Document transport sensor
Document transport
(SPF side)
Time chart (Tray feed)
752msec
625msec
756msec
PSW
MIRR M
SPF M
CL
SPUSSPPD
SCANST
MAIN M
CPFS1
RRSPPD1
PPD2
POD
AL-1551CS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 9
C. Back copyDocument transport:
By switchback operation, the document is sent through the PS roller tothe exposure section, where the back of the document is exposed.
• It is sent to the document exit section by the transport roller and thepaper exit roller.
• R-SPF gate solenoid ON. The document is sent to the intermediatetray, (but not discharged completely.)
• It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed.
• It is sent through the PS roller and the exposure section (withoutexposure operation) to the document exit section.
• R-SPF gate solenoid OFF
• The document is discharged to the document exit tray.
Paper transport:
Switchback operation is performed.
• The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and theduplex transport section, and the PS roller, and the images on theback are transferred.
• It is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exittray.
Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to dischargedocuments according to the setting.
Set document Documents after discharge,
There are following job modes as well as D-D mode.
S - S (Simplex to Simplex)
S - D (Simplex to Duplex),
Rotation copy mode (The back images are rotated 180°C.)
S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotation
D - S (Duplex to Simplex)
Rotation copy mode:
The front and the back are in upside down each other.
Copy mode without rotation:
The front and the back are not in upside down.
1 with empty feed
4without empty feed
32 3 43 2 14 1 2
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the fol-lowing sections:
1. High voltage section
2. Operation panel section
3. Optical section
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
6. Manual paper feed section
7. Rear frame section
8. Power section
9. SPF section
10. 2nd cassette section
11. Duplex motor section
12. Reverse roller section
13. RSPF section
1. High voltage sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.
2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and removethe transfer charger.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
D. Charger wire cleaning
1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord forsafety.
1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the harnessduring the machine is powered. Especially be careful not todisconnect or connect the harness between the MCU PWBand the LSU (MCU PWB: CN119) during the machine ispowered. (If it is disconnected or connected during themachine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will be destroyed.)
2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, besure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec beforedisconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immediatelyafter turning off the power.)
No. Part name Ref.1 Transfer charger unit2 Charger wire
1)
2)
2)
1)
1)Transfercharger
Lock pawl rear
Lock pawl front
1)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2
2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it recipro-cally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figurebelow.
E. Charger wire replacement
1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.
2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2).At that time, be careful of the following items.
• The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1
• The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be inthe range of the projection section.
• Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
2. Operation panel sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.
2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panelunit.
1)
2)
3)4)
1mm
1.5mm
Fig.1
1)
1)
2)
3)
Charger wire
Protrusion
No. Part name Ref.
1 Operation panel unit2 Operation PWB
1)
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet.
4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
3. Optical sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rearcabinet cover.
2) Remove the connector and the clamp, and remove the RSPF unit.
3) Remove the four screws, remove the operation unit, and discon-nect the connector.
4) Remove the right cabinet.
5) Remove the left cabinet.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover.
7) Remove the table glass.
NO. Part name Ref.
1 Copy lamp unit
2 Copy lamp
3 Lens unit
1)
1)
1) 1)
2)
3)
3)
3)
4)
Note that there are 10 pawls
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)
3)
5)
4)
1)
2)
1)
1)
2)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
1)
1)
3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4
8) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure.
9) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.
10) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the ten-sion, and remove the belt.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.
12) Remove the rod.
13) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connec-tor, and remove the carriage.
C. Assembly procedure
CCD core
1) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness.
2) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB connector of thecarriage unit.
3) Move the core which was passed through the CCD-MCU harnessnear the CCD PWB connector as shown in the figure below, and fixit with a filament tape (19mm wide, 40mm long). For the attach-ment reference, refer to the figure below. Clean and remove oilfrom the attachment section.
4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back ofthe carriage unit.
5) Attach the PWB holder to the position specified in the figure below.
6) Pass the core through the FFC and the PWB holder, and fix thecore.1)
2) 4)
3)
1)2)
3)
1)
2)
4)
3)
Marking lineNote: Attach the FCCto fit with the marking line.
Note: Attach the FCC to the baseplate securely with duplex tape toprevent against coming loose.
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5
4. Fusing sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusingunit.
3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the ther-mistor.
4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.
Pressure roller section disassembly
5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on theright side, and open the heat roller section.
6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
No. Part name Ref.
1 Thermistor2 PPD2 sensor
3 Heater lamp
4 Pressure roller
5 Heat roller
1)
2)3)
2)
1)
2)
3)Thermistor
1)
2)
1)
5)
5)
6)
6)
4)3)2)
1)
2)PPD2 sensor
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6
7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.
8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.).
9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides.
11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring.
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (*).
Heat roller disassembly
(Continued from procedure (4).)
5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat rollersection.
1)
2)
Heater lamp
3)
1)
2)
2)
1)
3)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
1)
3)
3)
Pressure roller
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7
6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heatroller.
7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with *.
8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5. Tray paper feed/transport sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.
2) Disconnect three positions of the connectors.
3) Remove six screws, and remove the scanner unit.
4) Remove the fan duct.
4) Remove each connector and three screws, and remove the MCUPWB.
1)2) 3) Heat roller
1)2
3)
1)
2)
3)
No. Part name Ref.
1 PPD1 sensor PWB2 LSU unit
3 Intermediate frame unit
4 Paper feed roller
2)
1)
2)2)
2) 2)
2)
3)
1)
1)1)
1)1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8
5) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transportdetection sensor (PPD2).
6) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
7) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit.
8) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper exitroller.
2)
1)
3)
1)
2)
1)
2)
4)
2)
1)3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9
9) Pull out the paper exit roller knob and remove the belt.
10) Release the belt pulley (a) lock and remove the belt pulley bearing.
11) Remove the paper exit roller.
12) Remove the harness guide.
1)
2)
2)3)
1)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10
13) Remove five screws and remove the main drive plate and the belt.
14) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressurerelease solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
15) Remove six screws and remove the LSU unit.
The scan inclination classification is indicated on the right or theleft of the LSU production number label according to the classifica-tion.
When replacing the LSU, add the spacer according to the scaninclination classification. (The spacer is packed together with everyLSU.)
Scan inclination classification check
Scan inclination classification 1: +0.26 – +0.5 (White marking onthe right of the production number label)
Scan inclination classification 2: – 0.25 – +0.25 (White marking)
Scan inclination classification 3: – 0.5 – – 0.26 (White marking onthe left of the production number label)
1)
3)
2)
1)
CAUTION:Attach the gears securely
3)
3)
1)
1)
2)
2)
4)
4)
1)
1)
2)
LSU spacer not required
Machine rear side Add one LSU spacer.
Machine front side Add one LSU spacer.
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11
Addition of the spacer
Scan inclination classification 1: Add the LSU spacer to the rearside of the machine.
Scan inclination classification 2: No need to add the spacer.
Scan inclination classification 3: Add the LSU spacer to the frontside of the machine.
[Note for assembling the LSU]
When installing the LSU, turn the LSU clockwise and fix withscrews in order to provide an attachment backlash in the properdirection.
Observe the following sequence of fixing screws.
16) Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.
Insert into thepositioning boss.
Fit the holes and attach.<Machine rear side>
Machine front side
Insert into thepositioning boss.
Fit the holes and attach.
<Machine front side>
13
52 4
6
2)
1)
3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12
17) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.
18) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediateframe unit to remove.
19) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circu-lar earth plate and the PS roller unit.
20) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS rollerunit.
21) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
22) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sen-sor PWB.
2)
2)
3)
4)
1)
5)
4)
4)
1)
2)
3)
PS roller unit
PS semi-circulerearth plate
5)
4)
4)
1)
2)
3)
PS roller unit
PS semi-circularearth plate
1)
2)
1)
2)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13
23) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.
24) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
6. Manual paper feed sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
Single unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the single upper cover.
2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
No. Part name Ref.
1 Manual transport roller2 Cassette detection switch
3 PPD1 sensor PWB
4 Side door detection unit
4)
5)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Back
Front
Clutch unit
Paper feedroller
1)
2)
1)
2)
Back Wire treatment
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14
3) Remove three screws and remove the single manual feed upperframe.
4) Remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.
5) Remove the E-ring and remove the manual paper feed transportroller.
6) Remove the cassette detection switch.
1)
2)
1)
3)
1) 2)
Wire treatment
3)
3)
4)
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
Wire treatment
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15
7) Remove the multi cover.
Multi unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upperframe.
Multi cover
2)
1)
1)
2)
Back Wire treatment
1)
2)
1)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16
4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit fromthe multi paper feed upper frame.
5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed rollerB9.
6) Remove the pick-up roller.
7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
2)
2)
1) 1)
2)
1) 1)
1)
3)
L O C K
TO
K
2)
1)
1)
2)3)Multi paper feedsolenoid
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17
D. Pressure plate holder attachment
1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is notcovered with the seal M1-N.
7. Rear frame sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rearcabinet cover.
2) Disconnect the connector.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.
4) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the mainmotor.
5) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaustfan motor.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
No. Part name Ref.
1 Mirror motor
2 Main motor3 Exhaust fan motor
Pressure plateholder
Seal M1-N
Attachmentreference
Attachmentreference
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18
8. Power sectionA. List
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Disconnect each connector.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
9. SPF section (SPF model only)
Pickup unit removal
1) Remove three fixing pawls from the bottom of the machine.
2) Remove the front cover and the rear cover.
1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame Spring, and two harnesses.
2) Remove the pickup unit.
* When installing the parts, be careful of the hole position of the paperframe Spring.
A. Sensor PWB
1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.
2) Remove the upper cover.
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the sensor PWB.
3) Remove the harness.
No. Part name Ref.
1 Power PWB
No. Part name Ref.
A Sensor PWB
B Pickup solenoid
C Clutch
D Manual paper feed roller, pickup rollerE Belt
F SPF motor
G Paper entry sensor
H PS roller
I Paper exit roller
1) 1)1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)5)
1)
1
2
2
1
1
34
32
11
2
1
1
11
2
3
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 19
B. Pickup solenoid
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the pickup solenoid
* When installing, hang iron core A on the solenoid arm.
C. Clutch
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the pulley and bush.
3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.
4) Lift the clutch, and 5) remove the clutch.
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the parts.
D. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller
1) Lift the paper stopper.
2) Slide the take-up roller unit.
3) Slide the bushing in the direction of the arrow.
4) Remove the take-up roller unit.
* When installing the take-up roller, hang the projection of the take-uproller unit on the solenoid arm.
1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the manual paper feed roller.
3) Remove the pickup roller.
4) Remove the parts.
Transport unit removal
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the document tray unit.
3) Remove five screws.
4) Remove the transport unit.
12
A
1
5
2
43
1
2
1
42
3
A
1
2
3 1
1
4
1
2
1
3
3
3
3
4
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 20
E. Belt
1) Remove the belt.
F. SPF motor
1) Remove the harness.
2) Remove four screws.
3) Remove the drive unit.
4) Remove the belt.
5) Remove two screws.
6) Remove the SPF motor.
G. Paper entry sensor
1) Loosen the screw.
2) Open the paper exit paper guide.
3) Remove the paper entry sensor.
4) Remove the harness.
H. PS roller
1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the paper supply roller.
I. Paper exit roller
1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the paper exit roller.
3
1
1
2
3
12
2
4
5
5
6
1
4
2
3
1
1
2
1
2
1
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 21
10. 2nd cassette section
Paper feed unit removal
1) Remove the screw.
2) Remove the rear cover.
* When installing, engage the pawl and install the unit.
1) Open the right cabinet.
2) Remove three screws.
3) Remove one connector from MCU.
4) While tilting down the 2nd connection arm A, pull and remove thepaper feed unit toward you.
* When installing, securely insert two bosses C on the machine sideand two bosses D on the paper feed unit side. Be sure to secure theground wire B.
* Insert the 2nd page feed.
A. Paper sensor
1) Remove the pawl.
2) Remove the paper sensor.
3) Remove the harness.
No. Part name Ref.
A Paper sensor
B Cassette detection SW
C Paper feed solenoidD Transport roller
E Paper feed clutch
F 2nd paper feed roller
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)
12A
1
2
4
B
A
3
2
D
D
C
2
3
1
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22
B. Cassette detection switch
1) Remove the pawl.
2) Remove the cassette detection switch.
3) Remove the harness.
C. Paper feed solenoid
1) Remove the screw.
2) Remove the connector.
3) Remove the paper feed solenoid.
D. Transport roller
1) Remove two E-rings.
2) Remove the transport roller.
* Install so that the earth spring A is brought into contact over bearingB.
E. Paper feed clutch
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the paper feed clutch.
3) Remove the parts.
* When installing, fit the cut surface A.
F. 2nd paper feed roller
1) Remove the E-ring and the parts.
2) Remove the 2nd paper feed roller.
* When installing, hang the 2nd connection arm on the 2nd connectionarm Spring B. Be sure to install so that the earth spring C is incontact under the bearing D.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
2
1
3AB
A
1
2
3
B
1
2
1
CD
A
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 23
11. Duplex motor section (RSPF model only)
A. Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Remove four screws.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
B. Remove the main PWB.
1) Disconnect each connector.
2) Remove four screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
3) Disconnect the connector.
4) Remove five screws, and remove the I/F PWB.
C. Remove the Duplex motor.
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the Duplex motor cover.
3) Remove the Duplex motor.
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gearwith the belt on the main body side.
12. Reverse roller section (RSPF model only)
A. Remove the reverse unit.
1) Remove four screws
2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire
3) Remove the reverse unit.
B. Remove the reverse roller.
1) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
1)
1)
1)
1)1)
1)1)
1)2)
2)
2)
3)1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
12
3
1
1
2
3
1
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 24
13. RSPF section (RSPF model only)A. RSPF
(1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Remove four screws.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
(2) Remove the RSPF.
1) Remove the connector and the cable.
2) Remove the RSPF.
B. Intermediate tray
1) Remove the intermediate tray.
C. Upper cover
1) Remove four screws from the bottom of the main body.
2) Remove the upper cover.
D. Pickup unit
1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame spring, and two harnesses.
2) Remove the pickup unit.
Note: When reassembling, be careful of the hole position for the paperfeed frame spring.
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 25
E. Upper cover of the pickup unit.
1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.
2) Remove the upper cover.
F. Sensor PWB
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the sensor PWB.
3) Remove the harness.
G. Pickup solenoid
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the pickup solenoid.
Note: When reassembling, hang the iron core on the solenoid arm.
H. Clutch
(1) Remove the clutch unit.
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the pulley and the bush.
3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.
4) Lift the clutch pawl.
5) Remove the clutch unit.
1
2
1
11
2
3
12
A
1
5
2
43
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 26
(2) Remove the clutch
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the parts.
I. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller
(1) Remove the pickup unit.
1) Lift the paper stopper.
2) Slide the take-up roller unit.
3) Slide the bushing in the arrow direction.
4) Remove the take-up roller.
Note: When reassembling, hang the convex portion of the roller uniton the solenoid arm.
(2) Remove the Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller.
1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the manual paper feed roller.
3) Remove the pickup roller.
4) Remove the parts.
J. Transport unit removal
1) Disconnect the connector, and cut the binding band.
2) Remove two screws, and remove the document tray unit.
3) Remove five screws, and remove the transport unit.
1
2
1
42
3
A
1
2
31
1
4
3
4
5
1
3
5
55
6
2
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 27
K. Belt 1
1) Remove the belt.
L. Belt 2
1) Remove three screws.
2) Remove the drive unit.
3) Remove the belt.
Note: When reassembling, hang the belt on the boss.
M. SPF motor
1) Remove the harness.
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the SPF motor.
N. Solenoid
1) Remove the harness.
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the solenoid.
1
12
3
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 28
O. Clutch
1) Cut the band with nippers.
2) Remove the harness.
3) Remove the clutch.
P. Paper supply roller
(1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove the two screws.
2) Remove the parts.
(2) Remove the paper supply roller.
1) Loosen the screw.
2) Open the paper exit paper guide.
3) Remove the parts.
4) Remove the paper supply roller.
Q. Paper entry sensor
1) Loosen the screw.
2) Open the paper exit paper guide.
3) Remove the paper entry sensor.
4) Remove the harness.
1
1
2
3
1
21
2 1
3
3
4
1
4
2
3
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 29
R. Transport roller 1.
(1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove the parts.
(2) Remove the parts.
1) Loosen the screw.
2) Open the paper exit paper guide.
3) Remove the parts.
(3) Remove the transport roller.
1) Remove the paper exit paper guide.
2) Remove the transport roller.
S. Paper exit roller
(1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the parts.
1
1
1
12
3
1
2
1
1
2
AL-1551CS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 30
(2) Remove the paper feed paper guide upper.
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the paper feed paper guide upper.
(3) Remove the paper exit roller.
1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the paper exit roller.
T. Solenoid
(1) Remove the reverse gate
1) Remove the ring
2) Remove the reverse gate
Note: When reassembling, be careful of the groove and the holepositions of the spring.
Note: When reassembling, hang 2) on the solenoid.
(2) Remove the solenoid.
1) Remove the screw.
2) Remove the solenoid.
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustmentThe copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanningdirection and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use SIM 48-1.
(1) OutlineThe main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustmentis made automatically or manually.
Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on theshading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scanning(front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically.
Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by manual keyoperations. (In either of the automatic and manual adjustments, thezoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.)
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted bychanging the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.
(2) Main scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Necessary tools
• Screwdriver (+)
• Scale
c. Adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scalefor precise adjustment.)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specifiedrange. If it is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedures.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment mode.To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key.
In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the PRINT switch ispressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading toscan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction valueand displaying and storing this value.
After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simulationmode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio.
If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100±1.0%),manually adjust as follows.
8) Set the adjustment mode to Manual with the copy mode select key.
9) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copymagnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press theCOPY button.
10) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio iswithin the specified range.When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio ischanged by 0.1%.
(3) Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part isreplaced.
2) When the main PWB is replaced.
3) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
4) When "U2" trouble occurs.
b. Necessary tools
• Scale
=Copy image dimensions
X 100 (%)Original dimension
Adjustment mode Lighting lamp
Main scanning direction auto copy magnification ratio adjustment
Auto exposure lamp ON
Main scanning direction manual copy magnification ratio adjustment
Manual exposure lamp ON
Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment
Photo exposure lamp ON
SPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment
Auto, Manual, Photo lamp ON
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDENEDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDENEDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
110
10 20
10 20
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)
Paper feeddirection
Reference Comparison point
Original (Scale)
Copy
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2
c. Adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a longscale for precise adjustment.)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratiousing the formula below.
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within thespecified range. (100 ± 1.0%).If it is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedures.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment mode.To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key.(Photo exposure lamp ON)
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copymagnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press theCOPY button.
Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copymagnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration ischanged by 0.1%.
B. Image position adjustmentThere are following five kinds of image position adjustments, which aremade by laser control except for the image scan start positionadjustment. For the adjustments, SIM 50 - 01, 50 - 10, 50 - 18 and SIM50 - 19 are used.
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 - 01, use the copy modeselect key.
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below.
: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installingmode.
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 - 10, use the copy modeselect key.
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lampsare as shown in the table below.
Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit
Machine with the single manual paper feed unit
Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment mode
=Copy image dimensions
X 100 (%)Original dimension
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
110
10 20
10 20
Original (Scale)
Paper feeddirection
Reference Comparison point Copy
No. Adjustment item Simulation1 Print start position 50 - 012 Image lead edge void amount 50 - 013 Image scan start position 50 - 014 Image rear edge void amount 50 - 015 SPF image scan start position 50 - 016 Center offset 50 - 107 Memory reverse position adjustment in
duplex copy50 - 18
8 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment 50 - 199 Duplex back print start position 50 - 19
Adjustment mode Lamp ON
Print start position (Main cassette paper feed)
AE, main cassette lamp
Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed)
AE, 2nd cassette lamp
Print start position (Manual paper feed) AE, manual feed lamp
Image lead edge void quantity TEXT lamp
Image scan start position PHOTO lamp
Image rear edge void quantity AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
SPF image scan start position AE, TEXT lamp
Adjustment mode Lamp ON
Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)
AE, main cassette lamp
Print center offset (Manual paper feed) AE, manual paper feed lamp
OC/document center offset AE, TEXT lamp
Adjustment mode Lamp ON
Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)
AE, main cassette lamp
Print center offset (Manual paper feed) AE, manual paper feed lamp
OC/document center offset AE, TEXT lamp
Adjustment mode Lamp ONImage cut rear edge void quantity (RSPF)
AE lamp
Paper rear edge void quantity TEXT lampPrint start position (Duplex back) PHOTO lampRSPF (Back) original center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3
(1) Lead edge adjustment1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.
2) Execute SIM 50 - 01
3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge voidamount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTOlamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%.
4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image.Set C = 10 X R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.)When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss isdecreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge andthe image print start position.Set A = 10 X H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.)When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge isshifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50)
6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm).When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount isincreased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void amountbecomes zero. (Default: 50)
(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size
as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14"paper.
2) Execute SIM 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amountadjustment mode.The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change theset value and repeat the adjustment procedure.The default value is 50.
Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet afterentering the simulation mode, the first sheet after turning off/onthe power, or the first sheet after inserting the cassette. Use thesecond or later sheet to check the rear edge void.
(3) Center offset adjustment1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so
that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the documentguide.
• Test chart for the center position adjustment.Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the papertransport direction.
2) Execute SIM 50 - 10 to select the print center offset (cassettepaper feed) adjustment mode.The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
5mm
10mm
(Example)Distance between paper leadedge and image: H = 5mm
Image loss:R = 3mm
B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper
A4 size rear edge
Scale image
Paper rear edge
Void amount (Standard value: 2 3mm)
Document guide
Center
Copy paper(A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″)
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properlypositioned.The standard value is 0 ±2mm from the paper center.
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the setvalue and repeat the adjustment procedure.When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by0.1mm toward the rear frame.
• For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feedadjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.
• Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by theCCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of documentguide, there is no need to adjust manually.
2. Copy density adjustment
A. Copy density adjustment timingThe copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When maintenance is performed.
• When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
• When the optical section is cleaned.
• When a part in the optical section is replaced.
• When the optical section is disassembled.
• When the OPC drum is replaced.
• When the main control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
• When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
B. Note for copy density adjustment1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment
• Clean the optical section.
• Clean or replace the charger wire.
• Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and thedeveloping bias voltage are in the specified range.
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment• One of the following test charts:
UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE
• B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper
• The user program AE setting should be "3."
Test chart comparison table
D. Features of copy density adjustmentFor the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function providedin the image process LSI is used.
List of the adjustment modes
E. Copy density adjustment procedureUse SIM 46 - 01 to set the copy density for each copy mode.
For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.
(1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter)
reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.
(Copy A)
(Copy B)
2.0mm or less
2.0mm or less
Copy image
Copy paperfolding line
Copy image
Copy paperfolding line
Shift
Shift
(Paper feed direction)
1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UKOG-0162FCZZ DENSITY No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
UKOG-0089CSZZ DENSITY No.
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
KODAK GRAY SCALE
1 2 3 4 19 A
Auto Mode Brightness 1 step only
Manual Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made.
Photo Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made.
Manual T/S mode
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made.
T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only
Test chart
White paper
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5
(2) Perform the adjustment in each mode.1) Execute SIM 46-1.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key.Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for the automode.)
3) Make a copy.Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of theexposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantitydisplay.
(When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quantitydisplay.
* The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.
3. High voltage adjustment
A. Main charger (Grid bias)Note:
• Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or moremeasurement.
• After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do notreverse the sequence.
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set thenegative side to the frame ground (power frame).
3) Execute SIM 8-3. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 secin the grid voltage LOW output mode.)
4) Adjust the control volume (VRG2) so that the output voltage is– 390 ±20V.
5) Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 secin the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
6) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580±12V.
B. DV bias check
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DVBIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (powerframe).
3) Execute SIM 8-1 to output the developing bias for 30sec, andcheck that the output is – 400±8V.
Adjustment modeExposure mode
display lampSharp gray chart adjustment level
Auto mode Auto lamp ON "3" is slightly copied.
Manual mode Manual lamp ON "3" is slightly copied.
Photo mode Photo lamp ON "3" is slightly copied.
Manual T/S mode Manual lamp/Photo lamp ON
"3" is slightly copied.
Auto T/S mode Auto lamp/Photo lamp ON "3" is slightly copied.
Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
Non toner save mode
Toner save mode
(1) Mode select key/display lamp
(2) Exposure level select key/display lamp
(1) (2)
1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
Note: • A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must beuse for correct check.
• The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can bemade.
VRG1VRG2
VRDV
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6
4. Duplex adjustment
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of adocument set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge positionof an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.
That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode(image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is oncestored in memory.
The image data is read, starting from its front end in the documentdelivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OCmode)and stored in memory.
This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position,in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.
In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjustedby changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of asheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, inthe S-D mode and the D-S mode.
3) Execute simulation 50-18 to make a copy and check the front edgeimage loss at the area where the scale is printed.Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0mm in the R-SPF mode.An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm inimage loss.
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy modeThis is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void)in duplex copying.
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from therear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make avoid area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paperjam at the fusing part.
There are two adjustment modes:
1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-SPF) 50-19(AE) The size (length) of a document read from the R-SPF is detected,the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut tomake a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the timewhen the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT)This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size isrecognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted bychanging the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cuttrailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) is adjusted.
(Adjustment procedure)
(1) Paper trailing edge void quantity
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of asheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)
2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the firstcassette.
• Letter paper: 4
• A4 paper: 3
5 10
Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode)
5 10
The front edge of thescale on test chart
Front edge of paper
Void area
less than 4 mm
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)
Document guide The trailing edge has a scale
Table glass
AL-1551CS ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7
4) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the TEXT lamp and make theprinting mode in OC-D mode.Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale onthe image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 ofsetting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF)1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.
2) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the AE lamp(on the operationpanel) and make the printing mode in the D-D mode.
3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy duringthis adjustment.
4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area.l Void position to be checked
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above.
Paper
Void position to be check
Scale (D-D mode)
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the simulation modeTo enter the serviceman simulation mode, press the keys as follows:Clear → Density select → Clear→ Density selectTo cancel the simulation mode, press the clear key.Flow chart of entering the simulation mode
1
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
1
NO
NO
YES
Is there a sub code ?
Press the COPY key.
Press the COPY key.
The COPY QUANTITYdisplay blinks to indicate"00" and the machine enters the readystate for sub code input.
Enter the sub code withthe COPY QUANTITY key.
10th digit
1st digit:
Press the COPY key.The current set adjustmentvalue and the countervalue are displayed on theCOPY QUANTITY displayed Sensor check,etc. are displayed by the
alarm lamps, etc.
To change the current setvalues, enter with the COPYQUANTITY key.
10th digit:
1st digit:
Count up of values: COPY QUANTITY key
Count down of values: Zoom key + COPY QUANTITY key
The entered valueis displayed on theCOPY QUANTITYdisplay.
Press the COPY key.
The entered value is registered.
Is it the
Perform the operationaccording to thesimulation number.
performed ?
Press the clear key.
All displays on theoperation panel go off, and the machine enters the ready state forentering the main code.
Press the clear key.
End
Is themain code the same ?
Is the sub codedisplayed ?
Press the clear key.
The COPY QUANTITYdisplay blinks to indicatethe previously set subenters the ready 7 state forsub code input. code, and the machine
Press the clear key.
Enter the new main code.
The main code isdisplayed on theCOPY QUANTITYdisplay.
Start
Press the clear key.
Press the exposuremode selector key.
All displays on theoperation panel go off,and the machine enters he ready state for entering he main code.
Count up of values: COPY QUANTITY keyCount down of values: Zoom key + COPY QUANTITY key
The main code isdisplayed on theCOPY QUANTITYdisplay.
simulation foroperation check?
Is anothersimulation to be
Enter the main code withthe COPY QUANTITY key.
10th digit:
1st digit:
Count up of values: COPY QUANTITY keyCount down of values: Zoom key + COPY QUANTITY key
Press the clear key.
Press the exposuremode selector key.
Within 1sec
Within 1sec
Within 1sec
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2
2. List of simulations
Sim No.
Kind ofmain code
Sub code
Operation
01 Optical system 01 Mirror scan operation
06 Aging of mirror scanning
02 SPF Individual load operation
02 SPF sensor status display03 Motor ON
04 Paper feed solenoid ON
05 Pressure release solenoid ON (RSPF)
06 Resist clutch ON (RSPF)
07 Gate solenoid ON (RSPF)
05 Lamp ON check
01 Operation panel display check
02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check
03 Copy lamp ON
06 Machine individual load operation
01 Paper feed solenoid ON
02 Resist solenoid ON
07 Aging 01 Warm-up display and aging with jam
06 Intermittent aging
08 High voltage output check
01 Developing bias
02 Main charger (Grid high)
03 Grid voltage (Low)
06 Transfer charger10 Other None Toner motor aging
14 Trouble reset None Cancel of troubles other than U2
16 U2 trouble reset
None Cancel of U2 trouble
22 Counter display
04 JAM total counter display
05 Total counter display
08 SPF counter display
12 Drum counter display
14 P-ROM version display17 Copy counter display
18 Printer counter display
19 Scanner mode counter display
21 Scanner counter display
22 SPF JAM counter display
24 Special counter clear
01 JAM total counter clear04 SPF counter clear
07 Drum counter clear
08 Copy counter clear
09 Printer counter clear
13 Scanner counter clear
14 SPF JAM total counter clear15 Scanner mode counter clear
25 Main motor ON
01 Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check)
10 Polygon motor ON
26 Various setup 01 Manual feed setup
02 (R) SPF setup
03 Second cassette setup
04 Machine duplex setup
06 Destination setup07 Machine conditions check
20 Rear edge void setup
30 CE mark support control ON/OFF
38 Cancel of stop at drum life over
39 Memory capacity check
40 Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for turning OFF after completion of printing)
42 Transfer ON timing control setup
43 Side void setup
44 SPF document rear edge read setup
62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setup
63 Fan control select setup30 Sensor
operation check (Standard provision)
01 Paper sensor status display
43 Fusing temperature setup
01 Fusing temperature setup (Normal copy)
04 Fusing temperature setup 2
05 Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy
09 Setup of fusing control of postcard size paper
46 Exposure adjustment
01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi)
02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi)
18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi)19 γ table setup or AE operation mode
setup
20 SPF exposure correction29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi)
31 Image sharpness adjustment
32 Copier color reproduction setup
48 Magnification ratio correction
01 Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment
49 01 Flash ROM program writing mode
50 Lead edge adjustment
01 Lead edge image position
10 Center offset adjustment
18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy
19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment
51 Timing adjustment
02 Resist quantity adjustment
53 08 SPF scan position automatic adjustment
61 Laser system operation
03 Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check)
63 Shading 01 Shading check
64 Self print 01 Self print
Sim No.
Kind ofmain code
Sub code
Operation
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3
3. Contents of simulationsInput method: Clear key → Exposure Select key → Clear key → Exposure Select key
Main code
Sub code
Content
01 01 Mirror scan operation(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the mirror home position is detected.
2. When the _START key is pressed, scanning is executed at the speed corresponding to the currently set copy magnification ratio.The copy magnification ratio can be arbitrarily set with the magnification ratio select key/zoom key.
06 Aging of mirror scanningWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. After 3 sec, the mirror case performs full scan again. These procedures are repeated until the clear key is pressed. (When the PRINT switch is pressed once, the ready lamp keeps OFF.)The status of the mirror home position sensor is displayed with the photoconductor cartridge lamp. (The lamp is ON when the mirror is at the home position.)During aging, the copy lamp keeps ON.
02 02 SPF sensor status display ON/OFF of the sensors in the SPF can be checked with the following lamps.
03 Motor ON (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the SPF motor rotates for 10 sec at the speed corresponding to the currently set magnification ratio.
04 Paper feed solenoid ON (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the SPF paper feed solenoid repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times.
05 Pressure release solenoid ON (RSPF) (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the RSPF document transport solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times.
06 Resist clutch ON (RSPF) (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the RSPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times.
07 Gate solenoid ON (RSPF) (Operation/Procedure) When the start key is pressed, the RSPF gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times.
05 01 Operation panel display check• When the PRINT switch is pressed, all LEDs (including 7-segment LEDs) on the operation panel are lighted. (LED check mode)• When 1Up key is pressed, the LEDs on the operation panel are lighted individually from the top left to the bottom right in sequence.
After completion of all individual lighting, all LEDs are lighted simultaneously. (The 7-segment LED lights the three-digit sections atthe same time.)Individual lighting frequency ON: 300ms, OFF: 20ms
• When the CLEAR key is pressed, this simulation is terminated.• When the PRINT switch is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine enters the Key input check mode.“Key input check mode”When the machine enters the Key input check mode, the value display section indicates “– – –.” Every time any key on the operat ion panel is pressed, the entered value is added and displayed on the value display section. However, the keys that were pressed once are not counted again.• When the PRINT switch is pressed, the entered value is added and displayed for 3 sec and all the LEDs are lighted. (LED lighting
check mode)(Note for Key input check mode)• Press the PRINT switch at the end. (If it is pressed in the middle of the process, the entered value up to that moment is displayed for
3 sec and the machine enters the LED lighting check mode. (ALL the LEDs are lighted.))• Multiple key inputs are ignored.
02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation checkWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats operations of 500ms-ON and 500ms-OFF 5 times. During that time, the cooling fan motor rotates.
Sensor name Display lampMirror home position sensor OPC drum cartridge replacement lamp
Display SensorDeveloper cartridge replacement lamp Document set detection (SPID)Jam lamp SPF document transport detection (SPPD)Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp SPF cover open/close detection (SDOD)SPF jam lamp SPF open/close detection (SDSW)
FAX document size detectionPaper size detection
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4
05 03 Copy lamp ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 5 sec.
06 01 Paper feed solenoid ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the paper feed solenoid selected by the tray select key repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500ms) 20 times.
02 Resist solenoid ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the resist solenoid (RRS) repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500ms) 20 times.
07 01 Warm-up display and aging with jam(Operation/Procedure)1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started.2. Warm-up time is counted and displayed every second on the copy quantity display.3. After completion of warm-up, the time count is stopped and the ready lamp is lighted.4. Press the clear key to clear the warm-up time display, set the copy quantity, and press the START key, and the machine will copy
the set quantity repeatedly.This simulation is canceled by turning off the power or executing any simulation which performs hardware reset.
06 Intermittent aging(Operation/Procedure)1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started.2. After completion of warm-up, the ready lamp is lighted.3. Set the copy quantity and press the START key, and the machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly.4. After 3 sec of the interval time from completion of copying the set quantity, the machine will resume copying.5. The above operation 4 is repeated.This simulation is canceled by turning off the power or executing any simulation which performs hardware reset.
08 01 Developing bias (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the developing bias is outputted for 30 sec.
02 Main charger (Grid high) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH mode.
03 Grid voltage (Low) (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage LOW mode.
06 Transfer charger (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the transfer charger output is supplied for 30 sec.
10 None Toner motor aging (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the toner motor output is supplied for 30 sec.
14 None Cancel of troubles other than U2 (Operation/Procedure) After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled.
16 None Cancel of U2 trouble(Operation/Procedure)1. When the START key is pressed, the EEPROM total counter check sum is rewritten and the trouble is canceled.2. After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled.
22 04 JAM total counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
05 Total counter display The total count value is displayed in 3 digits X 2 times repeatedly. <Display example: 12345>
08 SPF counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
12 Drum counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
14 P-ROM version displayThe main code and the sub code of the P-ROM version is displayed on the value display section in 2 digits alternately.The display method is the same as the total count value display.
17 Copy counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
Main code
Sub code
Content
012 → Blank → 345 → Blank → 0120.7s 0.3s 0.7s 1.0s 0.7s
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5
22 18 Printer counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
19 Scanner mode counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
21 Scanner counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
22 SPF JAM counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
24 01 JAM total counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the JAM total count value is reset to 0.
04 SPF counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF count value is reset to 0.
07 Drum counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the drum count value is reset to 0.
08 Copy counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the copy count value is reset to 0.
09 Printer counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the printer count value is reset to 0.
13 Scanner counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the scanner count value is reset to 0.
14 SPF JAM total counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF JAM total count value is reset to 0.
15 Scanner mode counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the scanner mode counter is reset to 0.
25 01 Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check)When the PRINT switch is pressed, the main motor (as well as the duplex motor in the duplex model) is operated for 30 sec. If the developing unit is installed at that time, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are outputted together in order to avoid toner consumption. Since, in this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is rotated at the same time. If the developing unit is not installed, the above high voltage is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.
: Do not execute this simulation by forcibly turning ON the door ON/OFF switch.
10 Polygon motor ON (Operation/Procedure) When the START key is pressed, the polygon motor is operated for 30 sec.
26 01 Manual feed setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set bypass code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number corresponding to the bypass and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
02 (R) SPF setupWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup of the SPF code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the SPF and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
03 Second cassette setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the second cassette is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed.
04 Machine duplex setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set duplex code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the ENTER key, and the setup will be changed.
Main code
Sub code
Content
Code number Bypass0 Single bypass1 Multi bypass
Code number SPF0 SPF not installed1 SPF installed2 RSPF installed
Code number Second cassette0 Without second cassette1 With second cassette
Code number Duplex0 Without Duplex1 With Duplex
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6
26 06 Destination setupWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup of the destination code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the destination and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
07 Machine conditions checkWhen this simulation is executed, the current machine setup is displayed.
20 Rear edge void setupWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup of the rear edge void code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the rear edge void and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
30 CE mark support control ON/OFFWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup of the CE mark support code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the CE mark support setup and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
38 Cancel of stop at drum life overWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup of the code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
39 Memory capacity checkWhen this simulation is executed, the current memory capacity is displayed.
40 Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for turning OFF after completion of printing)When this simulation is executed, the current setup of the code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
Main code
Sub code
Content
Code number Destination0 Inch series1 EX JAPAN AB series2 JAPAN AB series3 China (EX JAPAN AB series + Chinese paper support)
CPM Copy quantity display10 cpm 1012 cpm 1213 cpm 1314 cpm 1415 cpm 15
Code number Rear edge void setup0 Rear edge void provided * Default1 Rear edge void not provided
The default for CE-support 200V series is “1.”
Code number CE mark support setup0 CE mark support control OFF * Default (100V series)1 CE mark support control ON
Code number Setup0 Stop at drum life over * Default (AL model)1 Cancel of stop at drum life over
Code number Setup8 8 Mbyte
16 16 Mbyte
Code number Setup0 0 sec1 30 sec * Default2 60 sec3 90 sec
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7
26 42 Transfer ON timing control setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. (For any number different from the following
ones, the default time is automatically set.)
43 Side void setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the side void amount is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed.
44 SPF document rear edge read setup + Fax document rear edge scan setup.When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press the START key, and the display will be changed. The document rear edge scanning area in SPF reduction (less than 100%) copy is changed.The code number is changeable in the range of 0 – 8.The default value is 4, and 2 mm of the document rear edge is cut.When the value is changed by 1, the area is changed by 1 mm.
62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setupUsed to set half-ON (50%)/OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.When this simulation is executed, the current setup of the code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
63 Fan control select setupUsed to set the cooling fan operation mode.When this simulation is executed, the current setup of the code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
Main code
Sub code
Content
Code number Setting0 Default (330 msec)1 – 40 msec2 – 30 msec3 – 20 msec4 – 10 msec5 Default (330 msec)6 +10 msec7 +20 msec8 +30 msec9 +40 msec
Code number Setting0 0 mm1 0.5 mm2 1.0 mm3 1.5 mm4 2.0 mm * Default5 2.5 mm6 3.0 mm7 3.5 mm8 4.0 mm9 4.5 mm10 5.0 mm
Code number Setup0 Copy lamp half-ON (50%) * Default1 Copy lamp OFF
Code number Setup1 1-speed fan control2 2-speed fan control * Default when starting mass production
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8
30 01 Paper sensor status displayIndicates the paper sensor status using the lamps on the operation panel.
43 01 Fusing temperature setup (Normal copy)(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
04 Fusing temperature setup 2(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
05 Fusing temperature setup in duplex copyIn duplex copy, this setup value is added to the fusing temperature of single copy. When this simulation is executed, the current setup of the code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the PRINT switch to enable the setup.
09 Setup of fusing control of postcard size paper
Main code
Sub code
Content
Sensor name Display lampBefore-resist paper sensor (PPD1) Developer cartridge replacement lampFusing section paper sensor (PPD2) JAM lampPaper exit sensor (POD) Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp2nd CS paper sensor (PPD3) 2nd cassette lampNew drum cartridge sensor (PUIS) Zoom lampSingle manual feed paper sensor (MFD) AE lamp
Code number Set temperature (°C)0 1751 1802 1853 1904 195 (* Default)5 200
Code number Set temperature (°C)0 1551 1602 1653 170 (* Default)4 1755 180
Code number Temperature shift (°C)0 ±0°C * Default1 – 8°C2 – 6°C3 – 4°C4 – 2°C5 ±0°C6 +2°C7 +4°C8 +6°C9 +8°C
The default for Japan model is “1.”
Code number Setup0 Cancel * Default1 Setup
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9
46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi)Used to set the copy density in each mode.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading operations are performed and the current setup is displayed in two digits (default: 50).Change the setup value with the copy quantity keys. Press the PRINT switch and a copy is made according to the new setup.The greater the setup value is, the darker the copy is. The smaller the setup value is, the brighter the copy is. Only EXP.3 copy is made in this simulation. When set to a darker level, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When set to a brighter level, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become brighter. Press the CLEAR key to save the setup and exit from the simulation mode.Use the copy mode select key to select a copy mode . The setup value of the selected copy mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.(adjustment range: 0 – 99)
02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi)Used to set the copy density in each mode.(Operation/Procedure)When this simulation is executed, the machine performs warm-up and shading, and the current setup value is displayed in two digits. (Default: 50)Use the copy quantity key to change the setup value, and press the PRINT switch to make a copy with the new setup.The greater the setup value is, the darker the copy is, and vise versa. Only EXP.3 copy is made. If it is set to a darker density, EXP.1 and EXP.5 copies also become darker. If it is set to a brighter density, they also become brighter.When the CLEAR key is pressed, the entered setup value is saved and the simulation is terminated.Any copy mode can be selected with the copy mode select key. The setup value of the selected copy mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.(Setup range: 0 – 99)
18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi)Used to set the image contrast in each mode.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading operations are performed and the current setup value is displayed in two digits. (Default: 50)Change the setup value with the copy quantity keys. Press the PRINT switch and a copy is made according to the new setup. The greater the setup value is, the higher the contrast is. The smaller the setup value is, the lower the contrast is. Though only EXP.3 copy is made in this simulation, the contrast levels in EXP.1 and EXP.5 are also changed. Press the CLEAR key to save the setup and exit from the simulation mode.Use the copy mode select key to select a copy mode . The setup value of the selected copy mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.(adjustment range: 0 – 99)
Main code
Sub code
Content
Copy mode Display lampAE mode (300dpi) AE mode lampTEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lampTS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lampTS mode (AE) (300dpi) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
Copy mode Display lampAE mode (600dpi) AE mode lampTEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lampTS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lampTS mode (AE) (600dpi) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
Copy mode Display lampAE mode (300dpi) AE mode lampTEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lampTS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lampTS mode (AE) (300dpi) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10
46 19 γ table setup or AE operation mode setupWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup of the gamma table code number is displayed. (Default: Japan = 1, EX Japan = 2) Enter the code number corresponding to desired gamma table, and press the PRINT switch or the copy mode select key to enable the setup.
When the copy mode select key is pressed during setup of the gamma table, the mode is switched to the AE operation setup mode and the current setup of the AE operation mode code number is displayed. (Default: 0) Enter the code number corresponding to your desired AE operation mode, and press the PRINT switch or the copy mode select key to switch the setup. (When the copy mode select key is pressed, the mode is returned to the gamma table setup mode.)
20 SPF exposure correctionUsed to adjust the exposure correction quantity in the SPF mode by adjusting the differential of Vref voltage for the OC mode.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the PRINT key to enable the setup and make a copy.When the CLEAR key is pressed, the entered value is saved and the simulation mode is terminated.∗ The greater the value is the darker the exposure is.
The smaller the value is, the brighter the exposure is.
29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi)Used to set the contrast in each mode.(Operation/Procedure)When this simulation is executed, the machine performs warm-up and shading, and the current setup value is displayed in two digits. (Default: 50)Use the copy quantity keys to change the setup value, and press the PRINT switch to make a copy with the new setup.The greater the setup value is, the greater the contrast is, and vise versa. Only EXP.3 copy is made, however, EXP.1 contrast and EXP.5 contrast are also changed accordingly.When the CLEAR key is pressed, the entered setup value is saved and the simulation is terminated.Any copy mode can be selected with the copy mode select key. The setup value of the selected copy mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.(Setup range: 0 – 99)
31 Image sharpness adjustmentUsed to adjust the clear/shading-off of an image in each mode.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading operations are performed and the current setup value is displayed. (Default: 1)Change the setup value with the copy quantity keys. Press the PRINT switch and a copy is made according to the new setup. When the clear key is pressed, the entered setup value is saved and the simulation is terminated.
Any desired copy mode can be selected with the copy mode select key. The code number of the selected copy mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Main code
Sub code
Content
Code number γ table1 Image quality priority mode2 Toner consumption priority mode
Code number AE operation mode0 Fixed process * Default1 Real time process
Copy mode Display lampAE mode (600dpi) AE mode lampTEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lampTS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lampTS mode (AE) (600dpi) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
Setup value Image quality0 Shading off1 Standard * Default2 Clear
Copy mode Display lampAE mode AE mode lampTEXT mode TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lampTS mode (TEXT) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lampTS mode (AE) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11
46 32 Copier color reproduction setupUsed to set color reproduction for each mode. Colors which are easily copied or which are not easily copied are selected.
(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup of the code number for each copy mode is displayed. (Default: 0)Change the setup value with the copy quantity keys and press the Print switch. A copy will be made according to the setup. At that time, the color component used for copying is changed.When the clear key is pressed, the entered code number is saved and the simulation mode is terminated.Any desired copy mode can be selected with the copy mode select key. The selected copy mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.
48 01 Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment(1) Front/rear direction magnification ratio auto correction: The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate is
scanned to perform automatic correction of the front/rear (main scanning) direction magnification ratio as well as automatic setup of the OC/document center offset value and of the image scan start position.The OC/document center offset value and the image scan start position automatically set in this simulation, can be checked by the respective manual setup simulation for each adjustment shown below.
(2) Front/rear direction magnification ratio manual correction: By key operations, the front/rear (main scanning) direction magnification ratio is set by changing the setup value of the ZOOM DATA register to AISC.
(3) Scan direction magnification ratio correction: The scan direction magnification ratio in the OC mode is set by changing the scan speed.
(4) SPF mode scan direction magnification ratio correction: The SPF mode scan direction magnification ratio is set by changing the scan speed.
(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50) Press the copy mode select key to select each setup mode and the setup display will change accordingly. In the case of the front/rear direction automatic adjustment, when the PRINT switch is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the shading white board, and the width of the reference line is scanned, and the correction value is calculated, and the value is saved.For manual adjustment, enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the PRINT switch, the set value will be saved and a copy will be made. When the clear key is pressed, the value entered will be saved and the simulation will be terminated. (Increasing the setup value by 1 increases 0.1%.)
In the front/rear direction magnification ratio automatic correction(1) When the calculated value of the scan correction value is within ±5%, “– –” is displayed.
(Cause) Erroneous position of the reference line on the white board, improper installation of the lens unit, etc.(2) In case of a scan error of the reference line, the jam lamp lights up.
(Cause) CCD error, no white board installed.∗ If the automatic correction of the magnification ratio cannot provide a satisfactory result, use the manual correction.
Main code
Sub code
Content
∗ This setup does not affect black-and-white copies.
Setup value Easy-to-copy colors Difficult-to-copy colors0 Purple/Blue/Red Yellow/Green/Light blue1 Light blue/Green/Blue Purple/Red/Yellow2 Yellow/Red/Green Blue/Light blue/Purple
Code number Component of use0 Green * Default1 Red2 Blue
Copy mode Display lampAE mode (including TS) AE mode lampTEXT mode (including TS) TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lamp
OC/document center offset → Sim50-10 Center offset adjustmentImage scan start position → Sim50-01 Lead edge image position
Adjustment mode Lamp ONFront/rear direction magnification ratio automatic correction AE lampFront/rear direction magnification ratio manual correction TEXT lampScan direction magnification ratio correction PHOTO lampSPF mode scan direction magnification ratio correction AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12
49 01 Flash ROM program writing mode(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, “d” is displayed on the display and the machine enters the Flash ROM program writing mode.Use the writing tool to write the program from PC. During writing, the display indicates as shown below. After completion of downloading, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.
50 01 Lead edge image positionUsed to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void quantity on the copy paper. The adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position and the print start position (resist roller ON timing) at 100%.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup value is displayed the current setup value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50) Press the copy mode select key to select your desired coy mode, and the display will change. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the PRINT switch, and the setup value will be saved and a copy will be made. Press the clear key to save the setup value and exit from the simulation mode. When the adjustment is made for the main cassette feed, all the adjustment values at all the paper feed ports become the same. (Increasing the setup value by 1 corresponds to about 0.1mm shift.)
(Adjustment procedure)
1. Set the print start position (A), the lead edge void quantity (B) and the scan start position (C) to 0, and make a copy at 100%.2. Measure the image loss quantity (R mm) of the scale.
Set C = 10 × R (mm) (Example: Set 40.)When the value C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
3. Measure the distance (H mm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.Set A = 10 × H (mm) (Example: set 50)When the value A is increased by 1mm, the image lead edge is shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50)
4. Set the lead edge void quantity to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)When the value B is increased by 10, the void is increased by about 1mm.(When set to 25 or less, the void becomes zero.)
∗ The SPF adjustment is performed by adjusting the SPF image scan start position.
Main code
Sub code
Content
∗ “*” in an error display indicates the error position.
Status Display Pre-heat lamp Ready lampDownload data reception “d” ON ON OFFData erase start “d” ON OFF ONData writing (Boot section) “d” ON Blink OFFData writing (program section) “d” ON Blink BlinkSum check “d” ON ON ONDownload complete “0FF” ON OFF OFFError state “E *” ON OFF OFF
1 Data reception error2 Loader function transfer3 FLASH ROM delete4 FLASH ROM writing (Boot section)5 FLASH ROM writing (Program section)6 Sum check (Loader section)7 Sum check (Boot section)8 Sum check (Program section)
: Supported if the model is installed and skipped if it is not installed.
Adjustment mode Lamp ONPrint start position (Main cassette paper feed) AE, main cassette lampPrint start position (2nd cassette paper feed) AE, 2nd cassette lampPrint start position (Manual paper feed) AE, manual feed lampImage lead edge void quantity TEXT lampImage scan start position PHOTO lampImage rear edge void quantity AE, TEXT, PHOTO lampSPF image scan start position AE, TEXT lamp
AE ON TEXT ON PHOTO ON↓ ↓ ↓
5mm
10mm
Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge: H = 5mm
Image loss:R = 4mm
(Example)
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13
50 10 Center offset adjustmentUsed to adjust the copy image position on the copy paper and the center offset position when scanning a document.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the PRINT switch, and the entered value will be saved and a copy will be made. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value will be saved and the simulation will be terminated. (When the setup value is increased by 1, shift is increased by 0.1mm.)
∗ When the setup value is too great, outside of the shading area may be read, and black streaks may be produced on the edges.When the adjustment value is increased, the image is shifted to the left.When the adjustment value is decreased, the image is shifted to the right.
18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copyWhen this simulation is executed, the current setup value of correction is displayed. Enter the correction value with the 10-key and press the PRINT switch, and the entered value will be saved. (Correction value 1 – 99, correction zero = 0, or 50) When the correction value is set to 0, the correction value is written as 50.Front surface printing in the S-D mode and printing on even pages in the D-S mode are reverse memory copy operations from the document rear edge section.When, therefore, the output image print position adjustment is required, adjust as follows:In the reverse memory copy operation, if the document scan direction is in the direction of the arrow in the figure, the scan rear edge section of the image is printed first.When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is in the rear edge section, and use this simulation to adjust so that the print image lead edge comes to the lead edge.Since printing is performed by processing the scanned image from the scan end position to the scan lead edge, the print lead edge position adjustment is performed by changing the end data position stored in memory with the simulation setup value.
19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustmentUsed to adjust the rear edge void quantity in duplex copy.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup value is displayed the current setup value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50 However, setup 50 = setup 0) When the correction value is set to 0, the correction value is written as 50. Press the copy mode select key to select your desired copy mode, and the display will change. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the PRINT switch, and the setup value will be saved and a copy will be made. (The paper information is cleared for every copying.) Press the clear key to save the setup value and exit from the simulation mode. (Increasing the setup value by 1 increases the void quantity by about 0.1mm.)
Main code
Sub code
Content
: Supported only for installing models, and skipped for not-installing models.
Adjustment mode Lamp ONPrint center offset (Main cassette paper feed) AE, main cassette lampPrint center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) AE, 2nd cassette lampPrint center offset (Manual paper feed) AE, manual paper feed lampOC/document center offset AE, TEXT lampSPF/RSPF (front) document center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
Print lead edgeLead edge void (1)Print start position
Rear edge voidPrint rear edge
Document transport directionScan lead edge
Scan end position(Default: Scan cut by void (1))
Scan directionScan rear edge
Paper transport direction
Adjustment mode Lamp ONImage cut rear edge void quantity (RSPF) AE lampPaper rear edge void quantity TEXT lampPrint start position (Duplex back) PHOTO lampRSPF (Back) original center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14
51 02 Resist quantity adjustmentUsed to adjust the contact pressure of paper against the machine resist roller and the RSPF resist roller.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current setup value is displayed.Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the PRINT switch, the entered set value will be saved and a copy will be made. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value will be saved and the machine will exit from the simulation mode.
53 08 SPF scan position automatic adjustmentPlace a black chart so that it covers the SPF scan glass and the OC glass, and execute the simulation with the OC cover open, the mirror unit scans from the home position to the SPF scan position to identify the SPF glass cover edge position by the difference in the CCD output levels of the SPF glass cover edge and the OC side document glass.Default is 50. Adjustment range is 0 – 99. Adjustment increment: 1 = about 0.127mmIf this adjustment is performed properly, the adjustment value is displayed. If it is abnormal, the jam lamp lights up. If the adjustment is not made properly, “– –” is displayed.
61 03 Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check)(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30 sec.At that time, the Zoom lamp is lit for 100msec for every 3 times that the HSYNC is detected.
63 01 Shading checkUsed to display the detection level of the white board for shading.(Operating procedure)When the PRINT switch is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white board for shading to light the copy lamp. Under this state, the level of one pixel at the CCD center which is not corrected for 10sec in 1 sec, and the result is displayed on the value display section.
64 01 Self printPrint of one page is made regardless of the status of the optical system.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. Enter the code number with the 10-key, and select the cassette with the cassette select key and press the PRINT switch, and paper feed operation will be made from the selected cassette and printing of the selected pattern will be made. Printing is in 1by2 mode, or grid pattern.
Main code
Sub code
Content
: Supported only for installing models, and skipped for not-installing models.
Adjustment mode Lamp ONMain cassette paper feed AE, main cassette lamp2nd cassette paper feed AE, 2nd cassette lampManual paper feed AE, manual paper feed lampRSPF document feed (front) AE, TEXT, PHOTO lampRSPF document feed (back) AE, TEXT lampduplex back TEXT, PHOTO lamp
∗ 2 – 99: print in 1by2.
Code number Pattern0 1by21 Grid pattern
AL-1551CS SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15
4. Trouble codesA. Trouble codes list
Main code
Sub code
Trouble content Detail of trouble
E7 01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory not-detected error
The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup (6M).Cancel method: Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2.
02 HSYNC not detected. LSU (laser diode, reception element, APC circuit) troubleLSU drive circuit (ASIC) trouble
10 CCD black level trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC, harness) trouble11 CCD white level trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC harness) trouble
Copy lamp lighting trouble (Copy lamp, inverter PWB)
12 Shading trouble (White correction)
Dirt on white plate for scanning white level
16 Laser output trouble LSU (laser diode, reception element, APC circuit) troubleLSU drive circuit (ASIC) trouble
F5 02 Copy lamp disconnection trouble
Copy lamp or copy lamp drive circuit (inverter PWB) troubleCopy lamp disconnection
H2 00 Thermistor open detection The fusing thermistor is open.
H3 00 Heat roller abnormally high temperature
The fusing temperature rises above 240°C.
H4 00 Heat roller abnormally low temperature
The fusing temperature does not reach 185°C within 27 sec of turning on the power, or the fusing temperature keeps at 140°C.
L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked)
The white area and the black marking on the shading plate are used to obtain the difference in the CCD level values for judgment of lock. When the difference in the levels of which and black is small, it is judged that the black mark could not be scanned by lock and the trouble code “L1” is displayed.
L3 00 Return is not completed within the specified time.
When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
L4 01 Main motor lock When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100 msec.
L6 10 Polygon motor lock The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation
U2 01 Counter sum check error When the counter check sum value stored in the EEPROM is abnormal.
04 EEPROM serial communication error
When a communication trouble occurs with the EEPROM.
AL-1551CS USER PROGRAM 11 - 1
[11] USER PROGRAM
The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the use conditions.
1. Functions that can be set with user programs
* Note: The power consumption values in pre-heat and auto shut off may be varied depending on the use conditions.
2. Change the settingExample: Changing the time to operate the auto clear function
(Change from 60 sec to 90 sec)
1) Press the right and the left exposure adjustment keys simulta-neously to start setting.
• Keep pressing the keys for 5 sec.
• Display lamps ( , , ) blink simultaneously and " -- " is dis-played on the copy quantity display.
2) Select the function code with the 10-digit key (copy quantity setkey).
• The number of the selected function blinks on the digit of 10 on thecopy quantity display.
• For auto clear, select " 1. "
• For setting, refer to the following function codes.
[Cancel] If a wrong code is entered, press the clear key and enter thecorrect function code.
* SPF only
3) Press the COPY button.
• The number blinking on the digit of 10 of the copy quantity display islighted.
• The number of the current set code blinks on the digit of 1.
4) Select the setting code with 1-digit key (copy quantity set key).
• To set to 90 sec, select " 3. "
• For setting, refer to the following set codes.
* Factory setting
• The number blinking on the digit of 1 of the copy quantity display is litup. This means the setting is completed.
[Cancel] When a wrong number of the function code is set, press theclear key and perform the procedure again from step 2.
5) Press the COPY button.
• The number blinking on the digit of 1 of the copy quantity display is litup. This means the setting is completed.
Note: To set another function, press the clear key after completion ofthis operation and perform the procedure from step 2.
6) Press either one of the exposure adjustment keys ( or ) tocomplete the setting.
• Display lamps ( , , ) go off and the copy quantity displayreturns to the normal state.
Function Contents Factory settingAuto clear • When a certain time is passed after completion of copying, this function returns to the initial state
automatically. The time to reach the initial state can be set in the range of 30 sec to 120 sec by the unitof 30 sec. This function can be disabled.
60 sec
Pre-heat • When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reduced toabout 40Wh/H (* Note).The time to start this function can be set in the range of 30 sec to 90 sec by theunit of 30 sec. This function cannot be disabled.
• When this function is operated, the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel lights up. To return to theinitial state, press any key on the operation panel. (When the COPY button is pressed, a copy is madeafter returning to the initial state.)
30 sec
Auto shut off passing time
• When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reduced toabout 18Wh/H (* Note). The time to start this function can be set in the range of 2 min to 120 min.
• When this function is operated, all the lamps except for the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel turnoff. To return to the initial state, press the COPY button.
5 min
Stream feeding Only models with SPF SetAuto shut off setting • Used to set or cancel this function. SetAuto/Manual mode resolution setup
• Used to set the resolution in the auto/manual mode. The speed priority (300dpi) and the resolutionpriority (600dpi) are effective for fine text and ultra fine text.
300 dpi
Function name Function code
Auto clear 1
Pre-heat 2
Auto shut off passing time 3
Stream feeding 4*Auto shut off setting 5
Auto/Manual mode resolution setup 6
Function name Set codeAuto clear 0 (OFF)
1 (10 sec)2 (30 sec)*3 (60 sec)4 (90 sec)
5 (120 sec)Pre-heat *0 (30 sec)
1 (60 sec)2 (90 sec)
Auto shut off 0 (2 min)*1 (5 min)2 (15 min)3 (30 min)4 (60 min)
5 (120 min)Stream feeding 0 (Cancel)
*1 (Setting)Auto shut off setting 0 (Cancel)
*1 (Setting)Auto/Manual mode resolution setup *0 (300 dpi)
1 (600 dpi)
AL-1551CS USER PROGRAM 11 - 2
3. Density level adjustment
A. AE level adjustment (OC mode)
[Input procedure]When the density select key is pressed and held for 5 sec after turningon the [PHOTO] mode lamp, the [AUTO] mode lamp blinks and thecurrent setup of the density level is displayed.
[Adjustment]The adjustment is made in 5 steps by pressing the density adjustmentkey.
[Terminating procedure]When the density select key is pressed, the mode display is changedfrom blinking to lighting, and the AE level setup is completed.
• In the AE level adjustment mode, all the keys except for the [Densityselect] key, the [Density adjustment] keys ([>] key and [<] key) aredisabled.
• In the AE level adjustment mode, the ready lamp and the onlinelamp are turned off.
• The auto mode level adjustment is applied only for the auto mode.
• When the machine enters the exposure adjustment mode of OConce, the adjustment mode is not changed though a document is seton the SPF until the setup is completed.
B. AE level adjustment (SPF mode)
[Input procedure]With the SPF mode lamp ON, when the density select key is pressedand held for 5 sec after turning on the [PHOTO] mode lamp, the[AUTO] mode lamp blinks and the current setup of the density level isdisplayed.
[Adjustment]The adjustment is made in 5 steps by pressing the density adjustmentkey.
[Terminating procedure]When the mode select key is pressed, the mode display is changedfrom blinking to lighting, and the AE level setup is completed.
• During the AE level adjustment mode, all the keys except for the[Density select] key, the [Density adjustment] keys ([>] key and [<]key) are disabled.
• During the AE level adjustment mode, the ready lamp and the onlinelamp are turned off.
• The auto mode level adjustment is applied only for the auto mode.
• When the machine enters the SPF exposure adjustment mode once,the adjustment mode is not changed though a document is removedfrom the SPF until the setup is completed.
• This function is not available for the OC model.
4. Toner save mode setup and cancel
[Input procedure]When the density select key is pressed and held for 5 sec after turningon the [TEXT] mode lamp, the [PHOTO] mode lamp blinks and the cur-rent setup of the density level is displayed.
[Setup/Cancel]When the density adjustment key [<] is pressed, Level 1 is lighted andthe toner save mode is set.When the density adjustment key [>] is pressed, Level 5 is lighted andthe toner save mode is canceled.
[Terminating procedure]When the density select key is pressed, the mode display is changedfrom blinking to lighting, and the setup is completed.
• During the toner save mode setup, all the keys except for the [Den-sity select] key, the [Density adjustment] keys ([>] key and [<] key)are disabled.
• During the toner save mode setup, the ready lamp and the onlinelamp are turned off.
• The toner save mode is applied in the auto mode and the manualmode.
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagramA. Overall block diagram
Car
riage
Uni
t
CC
D P
WB
12
V
R G8b
itsM
SB
/LS
B)
BV
CL
5VE
N
PS
WS
ELi
n
AD
CC
LKK
inB
SA
MP
, VS
AM
PS
DI,
SC
LK, L
OA
D1,
2,
T
G,
TG
2,
TG
3R
B,
CLB
, 1L
3.3V
Clock,Data,LATCH
CC
D (
uP
D88
61)
AF
E(A
D98
26)
C D S
A G C
M P X A
D 16
bits
C
CD
Driv
er
Ope
ratio
n P
WB
S
DR
AM
(8M
B/1
6MB
)
C
CF
L
Lam
pIn
vert
er
I/F P
WB
(Opt
iona
l)
AS
IC R
eset
IEE
E 1
284
I/F3.
3V
A[9
1]U
SB
I/F
D[1
50]
MM
D
LSU
UN
ITV
FM
Mai
n M
otor
PMD
TM+, TM–
DMT0/1/2/3
A
SIC
C
PU
H8S
/232
0
I E E E 1 2 8 4
L
aser
I/F P
WB
(Opt
iona
l)
Pol
ygon
Mot
or
OS
C(2
4MH
z)
OS
C(1
3.98
67M
Hz)
Oth
er L
oads
<A
SIC
I/O
>M
PF
S,R
RS
,HL,
PR
FA
N M
otor
SG
SS
RR
CS
PU
SS
PP
ST
CG
RID
LM
CB
IAS
MP
FS
CP
FS
2T
oner
Mot
orS
cann
er M
otor
CP
FS
1D
uple
x M
otor
Oth
er In
puts
CP
U IN
TE
RR
UP
TP
MC
LKM
HP
SS
PP
DC
PU
I/O R
TH
PP
D1,
PO
D, M
FD
, CE
D1,
TC
S,
DV
S1,
PP
D2,
PP
D3,
CE
D2,
DS
WS
SD
SW
, SP
ID, S
DO
D, D
RS
TM
ultiP
lexe
d
MC
U P
WB
UN
IT
I2C
Bus
A[1
6..0
]
D[1
58]
A[1
9..0
]
D[1
5..0
]A
[19
0]D
[15
0]
Pow
er R
eset
3.3V
3.3V
/5V
/5V
EN
/12V
24V
C
PU
H8S
/232
0 (1
9.66
08M
Hz)
EE
PR
OM
(2K
b)
Res
et IC
S
RA
M (
1Mb
x 1)
RO
M(4
Mb)
P
ower
Sup
ply
Uni
t(L
ow P
ower
/Hig
h P
ower
)
SP
MT
0/1/
2/3
SP
F M
otor
U S B 1 . 1
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 2
B. MCU PWB unit
Tone
r
Mo
tor
Mai
n
Mot
or
SP
F
Mo
tor
Dup
lex
Mo
tor
Sca
nner
Mo
tor
Ope
ratio
n
PW
B
CC
D
PW
B
Inve
rter
PW
B
Cop
y
Lam
p
PO
WE
R
SU
PP
LY
New
Dru
m
Det
ect
PP
D1
PO
D
MF
D
FA
N
Mo
tor
Cas
sette
Det
ect
CP
FS
MP
FS
RR
S
SD
OD
DS
PF
Mod
el O
nly
SP
F/D
SP
F
Mod
el O
nly
CN
106
CN
111
CN
114
CN
123
CN
108
CN
109
CN
117
CN
116
CN
110
IC12
6
CN
114
IC12
8
CN
122
LSU
UN
IT
(Pol
ygon
Mot
or)
IC12
7
CN
103
IC12
9
CN
124
IC10
3
CP
U(H
8S/2
320)
IC
106
A
SIC
HG
73C
119H
F
CN
123
IC12
1
IC11
5
IC11
7
IC11
4
IC11
9 IC
121
IC12
4
CN
101
IC12
5
CN
104
IC11
5
IC11
4
IC11
6
CN
102
CN
112
IC12
4
IC12
5 In
terlo
ck S
WIC
118
IC11
3
IC12
4 IC
121
CN
119
IC11
5
CN
107
IC11
3
Inte
rfac
e
PW
B
IC13
1
CN
105
/VID
EO
M
PR
DY
/SY
NC
SP
MT
_0 –
3
/DM
T_0
– 3
O
UT
_A+
– B
-
SH
OL
D
/LD
EN
PS
W
TM
A_O
M
MLD
/M
MD
KIN
1K
IN2
OP
_CLK
Etc
OP
_LA
TC
H
OP
_DAT
A
Etc
AF
E_C
LK
A
D_C
LK
VC
L
Etc
AF
E_D
B0
– 7
MT
_AT
_HO
ME
E
tc
US
BIN
V
PIN
V
MIN
E
tc
PAR
AD
0 –
7V
PO
UT
V
MO
UT
E
tc
/PO
FF
H
LO
UT
E
tc
3.3V
IN
5VIN
12
VIN
24
VIN
Etc
Etc
E
tc
TM
B_O
V
FM
OU
T
/VF
MC
NT
IC12
5
CN
120
PP
D2
TH
ER
MIS
TO
R
HIG
H V
OLT
AG
E
CO
NT
RO
L U
NIT
Hea
ter
Lam
p
DV
UN
IT
DV
SE
L
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 3
2. Circuit descriptionsA. Main PWB (MCU)
(1) GeneralThe MCU PWB is composed of:
• CPU peripheral sections which perform mechanical sequencecontrol and function job management
• Image process ASIC which performs image process, CCD control,LSU control, and print control
• Motor control circuit
• Mechanical load, sensor I/O circuit
It controls the processes for copying, the transport loads, fusing, theoptical system, the operation panel, and the option PWB.
(2) CPU signal table (HD6412320F)
PIN No.
Signal codeInput/Output
Operating
1 /CS1 Output SRAM chip select2 /CS0 Output Flash ROM chip select3 GND DGND4 GND DGND5 Vcc CPU3.3V6 A0 Output Address bus7 A1 Output Address bus8 A2 Output Address bus9 A3 Output Address bus
10 GND DGND11 A4 Output Address bus12 A5 Output Address bus13 A6 Output Address bus14 A7 Output Address bus15 A8 Output Address bus16 A9 Output Address bus17 A10 Output Address bus18 A11 Output Address bus19 GND DGND20 A12 Output Address bus21 A13 Output Address bus22 A14 Output Address bus23 A15 Output Address bus24 A16 Output Address bus25 A17 Output Address bus26 A18 Output Address bus27 A19 Output Address bus28 GND DGND29 A20 Pull-Up30 PSW Interruption
level inputPrint SW
31 SPPD Interruption level input
SPF paper sensor
32 CCD_TG Interruption level input
CCD horizontal sync signal
33 Mt_at_home Interruption level input
Mirror Home Position
34 /CPUSYNC Interruption level input
Horizontal sync (ASIC)
35 GND DGND36 GND DGND37 FW Interruption
level inputZero cross signal
38 ARB_INT Interruption level input
ASIC interruption
39 Vcc CPU3.3V40 D0 Data I/O Data bus41 D1 Data I/O Data bus42 D2 Data I/O Data bus43 D3 Data I/O Data bus44 GND DGND
45 D4 Data I/O Data bus46 D5 Data I/O Data bus47 D6 Data I/O Data bus48 D7 Data I/O Data bus49 D8 Data I/O Data bus50 D9 Data I/O Data bus51 D10 Data I/O Data bus52 D11 Data I/O Data bus53 GND DGND54 D12 Data I/O Data bus55 D13 Data I/O Data bus56 D14 Data I/O Data bus57 D15 Data I/O Data bus58 Vcc CPU3.3V59 ONL Output Online LED control60 TxD1 Output For debug61 D_CONT Output USB Pull-Up control62 BEO Output OPE LED control63 RESETOUT1 Output ASIC Reset signal64 CL_Reset Output Copy lamp control65 GND DGND66 /DREQ0 Pull-Up67 GND DGND68 GND DGND69 RY/BY Input Flash Busy signal70 KIN1 Input HC151 selector detection71 KIN2 Input HC151 selector detection72 TMCLK Output Toner motor lock73 TMEN Output Toner motor enable74 POFF Output Shut off control75 PMCLK Output Polygon clock76 DMT0 Output Duplex Motor signal77 DMT1 Output Duplex Motor signal78 DMT2 Output Duplex Motor signal79 DMT3 Output Duplex Motor signal80 WDTOVF Output NC Pull-Up81 /RES Input Reset82 NMI Output NC Pull-Up83 STBY Output NC Pull-Up84 Vcc CPU3.3V85 XTAL Input Clock86 EXTAL Output Clock87 GND DGND88 CPUCLK Output NC89 Vcc CPU3.3V90 Reset OUT NC 91 /RD Output Read signal92 /HWR Output Write signal (High address)93 /LWR Output Write signal (Low address)94 SELIN3 Output HC151 select signal 95 SELIN2 Output HC151 select signal96 SELIN1 Output HC151 select signal97 FAXSTS NC98 FAXCMD NC99 GND DGND100 GND DGND101 SCL Output EEPROM clock102 DSDA Data I/O EEPROM Data bus103 AVcc CPU3.3V104 Vref CPU3.3V105 RTH Analog
inputFusing thermistor
106 Analog input
NC Pull-Up
107 SIN1 Input HC151 select detection108 SIN2 Input HC151 select detection109 SIN3 Input HC151 select detection
PIN No.
Signal codeInput/Output
Operating
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 4
(3) Image process ASIC (HG73C119HF)a. General
The ASIC is composed of the three major blocks: the image processsection, the print control section, and the I/F section.
Image process section:
With image data from the CCD PWB in the operation mode deter-mined by the register setup, shading, AE process, input γ correc-tion, area separation, filter process, resolution conversion, zoomprocess, output γ correction, binary conversion (error diffusion,dither method, simple binary conversion) are performed.
Print control section:
When copying, the image-processed data are outputted to the LSUaccording to the LSU writing timing. When scanning, the imagedata are made into 8bit width and outputted to the I/F section(USB).
I/F section:
Controls the DRAM which is the image data buffer, and processesdata send/receive between the USB I/F and the IEEE1284 I/F.
The ASIC is controlled by writing the operation mode and the neces-sary setup values of the operation mode into the ASIC control registerbefore starting each operation. (For ASIC Pin configuration, refer to thetable at the end of this document.)
b. ASIC (Signal table)
110 USBIN Input IF PWB detection signal111 Input NC112 Input NC113 Avss DGND114 GND DGND115 /SCANSP Output Scan STOP signal116 /SCANST Output Scan START signal117 /TRANSST Output ASIC transfer signal118 /PRINTST Output Print Start signal119 SPMT3 Output SPF motor signal120 SPMT2/MIRCNT Output/
InputSPF motor signal/mirror counter
121 SPMT1 Output SPF motor signal122 SPMT0 Output SPF motor signal123 GND DGND124 GND DGND125 Vcc CPU3.3V126 PSL Output Power save LED control127 NC128 /CS2 Output ASIC chip select
PIN No.
Signal codeInput/Output
Operating
Scan start
CCD PWB
Shading
CC
D drive
AE
Resolution conversion, Zooming, lmage process circuit
Print data process circuit
DRAM control
PRINT control
DRAM8MB or 16MB
LSU
HSYNC
VSYNC
To CPU bus
ASIC
Image process section
I/F section
Print control section
ASIC control resistor
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
1 cpu_ad7 IN CPU CPU address bus2 cpu_ad6 IN CPU CPU address bus3 cpu_ad5 IN CPU CPU address bus4 cpu_ad4 IN CPU CPU address bus5 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
6 cpu_ad3 IN CPU CPU address bus7 cpu_ad2 IN CPU CPU address bus8 GND(CORE/DC) Power9 cpu_ad1 IN CPU CPU address bus
10 sgs OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF gate solenoid control signal "H":ON
11 srrc OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF resist roller clutch control signal "H":ON
12 spus OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF document feed solenoid control signal "H":ON
13 spfs OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF document transport solenoid control signal "H":ON
14 mrps1 OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF motor current control signal
15 mrps2 OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF motor current control signal
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 5
16 ope_latch OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit latch signal. Data take-in at "L"
17 op_data OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit data signal
18 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power19 op_clk OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit clock
signal20 vfmcnt OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan rotation
speed control signal. "H": High speed, "L": Low speed
21 GND(AC) Power22 vfm OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan control
signal. "H": Fan ON23 tc OUT Tr array IC Transfer charger
control signal. "H":ON24 gridl OUT Tr array IC Main charger grid
control signal. "H": L output
25 mc OUT Tr array IC Main charger control signal. "H": ON
26 mrps3 OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF motor current control signal
27 mm_y3 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor current control signal
28 bias OUT Tr array IC DV bias control signal. "H":ON
29 lden OUT Tr array IC Laser circuit control signal. "H": Laser circuit ON
30 pmd OUT Tr array IC Polygon motor control signal. "H": Polygon motor ON
31 GND(CORE/DC) Power32 mmd OUT Tr array IC Main motor control
signal. "H": Main motor ON
33 GND(CORE/DC) Power34 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
35 mpfs OUT Tr array IC Manual feed solenoid control signal. "H": ON
36 cpfs2 OUT Tr array IC Second cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. "H":ON
37 cpfs1 OUT Tr array IC Cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. "H":ON
38 poffr (Not used)39 rrs OUT Tr array IC Resist roller solenoid
control signal. "H":ON40 pr OUT Tr array IC Power relay control
signal. "H":ON41 hl OUT Tr array IC Heater lamp control
signal. "H":ON42 TMON OUT Tr array IC (Not used)43 TM_ OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control
signal 44 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power45 TM OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control
signal 46 miron OUT Buffer IC SPF scanner select
signal 47 GND(AC) Power48 spfon OUT Buffer IC SPF ON signal
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
49 mircnt OUT Buffer IC SPF scanner select signal
50 GND(AC) Power51 pcl_s_print (Not used)52 fax_s_print (Not used)53 es_s_print (Not used)54 prareaen (Not used)55 d_s_ATDI_B (Not used)56 GND(CORE/DC) Power57 VCC(CORE/
GND) 3.3V58 pfclko (Not used)59 RESET IN ASIC reset signal60 GND(CORE/DC) Power61 ATRST IN (Not used)62 ATCK (Not used)63 ATMS (Not used)64 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power65 ie1284_stb IN I/F board
connector/STB signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
66 ie1284_autofd IN I/F board connector
/AUTOFD signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
67 ie1284_slctin IN I/F board connector
/SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
68 ie1284_init IN I/F board connector
/INIT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
69 VCC(CORE/DC) 3.3V
Power
70 ie1284_slct OUT I/F board connector
SLCT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
71 ie1284_pe OUT I/F board connector
PE signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
72 GND(CORE/DC) Power73 ie1284_busy OUT I/F board
connectorBUSY signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
74 ie1284_ack OUT I/F board connector
/ACK signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
75 ie1284_fault OUT I/F board connector
/FAULT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
76 ie1284_rev OUT I/F board connector
/REV signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
77 ie1284_parad7 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
78 ie1284_parad6 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
79 ie1284_parad5 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
80 ie1284_parad4 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
81 ie1284_parad3 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
82 VCC(AC) 3.3V83 ie1284_parad2 IN/OUT I/F board
connectorDATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
84 ie1284_parad1 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
85 GND(AC) Power
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 6
86 ie1284_parad0 IN/OUT I/F board connector
DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
87 suspend OUT I/F board connector
SUSPEND signal (USB communication port)
88 vmin IN I/F board connector
VMIN signal (USB communication port)
89 vpin IN I/F board connector
VPIN signal (USB communication port)
90 rcv IN I/F board connector
RCV signal (USB communication port)
91 oen OUT I/F board connector
OEN signal (USB communication port)
92 vmout OUT I/F board connector
VMOUT signal (USB communication port)
93 vpout OUT I/F board connector
VPOUT signal (USB communication port)
94 tm2_15m (Not used)95 VCC(PLL) 3.3V Power96 GND(PLL) Power97 VCC(PLL) 3.3V Power98 GND(PLL) Power99 pfclk IN Clock100 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
101 GND(CORE/DC) Power102 ram_data0 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) data bus
103 ram_data1 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
104 ram_data2 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
105 GND(AC) Power106 ram_data3 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) data bus
107 ram_data4 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
108 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power109 ram_data5 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) data bus
110 ram_data6 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
111 GND(CORE/DC) Power112 ram_data7 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) data bus
113 ram_data15 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
114 ram_data14 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
115 VCC(CORE/DC) 3.3V
Power
116 ram_data13 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
117 ram_data12 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
118 GND(CORE/DC) Power119 ram_data11 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) data bus
120 ram_data10 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
121 VCC(CORE/DC) 3.3V
122 ram_data9 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
123 ram_data8 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus
124 GND(AC) Power125 ram_clk OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) CLK signal
126 ram_cke OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) CKE signal
127 xram_wde OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) WDE signal
128 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power129 GND(CORE/DC) Power130 xram_cas OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) CAS signal
131 xram_ras OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) RAS signal
132 xram_cs OUT SDRAM (Image process page memory) CS signal
133 VCC(CORE/DC) 3.3V
Power
134 ram_banks0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) BANK signal
135 ram_banks1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) BANK signal
136 GND(CORE/DC) Power137 ram_dqm0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) DQM signal
138 ram_dqm1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) DQM signal
139 ram_mad12 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
140 VCC(CORE/DC) 3.3V
Power
141 ram_mad11 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
142 ram_mad9 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
143 GND(AC)144 ram_mad8 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) address bus
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 7
145 ram_mad7 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
146 VCC(AC)147 ram_mad6 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) address bus
148 ram_mad5 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
149 GND(CORE/DC)150 ram_mad4 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) address bus
151 ram_mad10 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
152 ram_mad0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
153 VCC(CORE/DC)154 ram_mad1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page memory) address bus
155 ram_mad2 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
156 ram_mad3 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus
157 d_s_ATDO_B (Not used)158 cl OUT Logic IC Copy lamp control
signal159 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
160 afp_oeb (Not used)161 ccd_tg OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal162 GND(CORE/DC) Power163 afp_vsmp OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal164 ccdrs OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal165 ccdcp OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal166 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power167 afp_bsmp OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal168 ccd_ph2 OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal169 afp_afesdi OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal170 GND(AC) Power171 ccd_ph1 OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal172 VCC(CORE/DC)173 afp_adcclk OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal174 afp_afesen OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal175 GND(CORE/DC) Power176 afp_afesck OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal177 mtr_at_home IN CCD PWB Carriage home
position signal178 VCC(CORE/DC) Power179 afp_data7 IN CCD PWB Image scan data180 afp_data6 IN CCD PWB Image scan data181 afp_data5 IN CCD PWB Image scan data182 GND(CORE/DC) Power183 afp_data4 IN CCD PWB Image scan data184 afp_data3 IN CCD PWB Image scan data185 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power186 afp_data2 IN CCD PWB Image scan data187 afp_data1 IN CCD PWB Image scan data188 GND(AC) Power
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
189 afp_data0 IN CCD PWB Image scan data190 GND(CORE/DC) Power191 sfclk IN Clock192 tm2_24m (Not used)193 GND(PLL) Power194 VCC(PLL) 3.3V Power195 GND(PLL) Power196 VCC(PLL) 3.3V Power197 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
198 mtr_y1 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor current control signal
199 mtr_phase1 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
200 GND(CORE/DC) Power201 mtr_i01 OUT Motor
driverCarriage motor control signal
202 mtr_i11 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
203 mtr_i21 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
204 mtr_phase2 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
205 VCC(CORE/DC) 3.3V
Power
206 mtr_i02 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
207 mtr_i12 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
208 mtr_i22 OUT Motor driver
Carriage motor control signal
209 mtr_y2 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor current control signal
210 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power211 xsync IN LSU Horizontal sync signal
from LSU (/SYNC)212 xld OUT LSU Laser drive signal
(/VIDEO)213 GND(AC) Power214 xlend OUT LSU Laser APC signal
(/LEND)215 xcpuwr IN CPU CPU write signal216 xcpurd IN CPU CPU read signal217 scanstop IN CPU Scan stop signal218 scanst IN CPU Scan start signal219 transst IN CPU Data transfer start
signal220 printst IN CPU Print start signal221 tmen IN CPU Toner motor clock
enable signal222 testpin4 (Not used)223 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
224 testpin3 (Not used)225 tmclk IN Toner motor clock
signal226 GND(CORE/DC) Power227 testpin2 (Not used)228 testpin1 (Not used)229 testpin0 (Not used)230 cpudata15 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus231 cpudata14 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus232 cpudata13 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus233 cpudata12 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus234 cpudata11 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 8
(3) Reset circuitThis circuit detects ON/OFF of power to control start/stop of each cir-cuit. The 3.3V voltage of the main PWB is detected by the reset IC togenerate the reset signal.
When the power voltage reaches the specified level, the circuit opera-tions are started. Before the power voltage falls below the specifiedlevel, the circuit operations are stopped to prevent against malfunc-tions.
(4) Heater lamp control circuita. Outline
The heater lamp control circuit detects the heat roller surface tempera-ture and converts in into a voltage level. The converted voltage isinputted to the CPU analog input pin.
The CPU converts the inputted analog voltage into a digital signal leveland compares it with the set value of the simulation to control on/off theheater lamp according to the level, maintaining the heat roller surfacetemperature at a constant level.
The lower the heat roller surface temperature is, the greater the ther-mistor resistance is, and vise versa.
Therefore, the lower the heat roller surface temperature is, the higherthe thermistor terminal voltage is, and vise versa. The thermistor termi-nal voltage is inputted to the CPU analog port.
The CPU controls ON/OFF of the heater lamp by this input voltagelevel.
[High temperature protect circuit in case of CPU hung up]
For IC120 3pin (reference voltage), +3.3V is divided by the resistor.
The thermistor terminal voltage is inputted to IC120 2pin.
When, the voltage at 2pin becomes lower than the voltage at 3pin(when the heat roller temperature is about 220 – 230°C), IC120 1pinbecomes HIGH, and the HL signal is lowered to the GND potentialthrough IC124, stopping generation of the heater lamp ON signal.(IC120 1pin is normal LOW.)
235 cpudata10 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus236 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power237 cpudata9 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus238 cpudata8 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus239 GND(CORE/DC) Power240 cpudata7 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus241 cpudata6 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus242 cpudata5 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus243 cpudata4 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus244 VCC(CORE/DC)
3.3VPower
245 cpudata3 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus246 cpudata2 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus247 cpudata1 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus248 cpudata0 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus249 VCC(AC) 3.3V Power250 xcpucs IN CPU CS signal251 mem_intr (Not used)252 GND(AC) Power253 arb_intr OUT CPU INTR signal254 cpusync OUT CPU CPU SYNC signal255 cpu_ad9 IN CPU CPU address bus256 cpu_ad8 IN CPU CPU address bus
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUTConnected
toDescription
Reset_OUT (ASIC Reset)
VCC3 VCC3
R114 11kF
C124 0.1u
C125 22000p
R117 10kF
IC104
M51957BFP
NC 8
GND 4
VCC 7NC 1
IN 2
NC 3
Cd 5OUT 6
R115 10kJ
CPU
P34
/RES
ASIC
12VVCC3
VCC3 VCC3
12VVCC3
12V
12V
12V
VCC3
5V
FTH
RTH
THOPEN
RTH_IN(1-A3)
(4-A3)
(5-B2)
(9-C2)
or KIA393F
or KIA393F
or KIA358F
or KDS226 or KDS226
R1567.5kF
R1594.3kF
D101
MA700
R1551MF
R1541kF
R15810kF
R1571kJ
C19722000p C199
0.1u
R169300J R170
100J
C198
0.1u
D102
DA204K
1
23
D103
DA204K
1
23
R1711.2kF
R17310kF
R17210kJ
C200
22000p
+
-
IC120A
NJM2903
3
21
84
C196
0.1u
+
-
IC120B
NJM2903
5
67
84
+
-
IC122A
LM358
3
21
84
CPU
AN0
t
12
Thermistor
Heat Roller
SW5V
(3-3B) HLHT EMP HLOUT (10-3A)
/HL
IC205
TD62503F
I11 O1 16
I22 O2 15
I33
I44 O3 14
I55 O4 13
I66 O5 12
I77COM8
O6 11O7 10
NC 9
R27
424
0J
R28
024
0J
Q205
DTA143XKA
OUT
IN
GND
D1031SS133
AK
To AC circuit(Heater lampControl)
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 9
[When the heat roller surface temperature is lower than the setlevel]
1) Since the thermistor terminal voltage is higher than the set level,the HL signal from the CPU becomes HIGH.
2) The HL signal is turned to be the HLOUT signal through IC124 pro-tect circuit, and inputted to the photo triac coupler on the powerPWB.
3) When the internal triac turns on, a pulse is applied to the gate of theexternal triac. Consequently a current flow from the power sourcethrough the heater lamp to the triac, lighting the heater lamp.
[When the heat roller surface temperature is higher than the setlevel]
1) Since the thermistor terminal voltage becomes lower than the setvalue, the HL signal from the CPU becomes LOW.
2) The HL turns LOW, the photo triac coupler on the power PWB turnsOFF, the external triac turns OFF, and the heater lamp turns OFF.
[In case of the thermistor open]
The voltage at IC120 6pin over the voltage at 5pin to drive the outputTHOPEN at 7pin to LOW. This is passed to the CPU and the troublecode "H2" is displayed.
(5) Driver circuit (Solenoid)a. Outline
Since the load signal from the CPU or the ASIC cannot drive the loaddirectly, it is passed through the driver IC to drive the load.
b. Operation
The driver circuit forms a Darlington circuit with transistors. Therefore alarge drive current is obtained from a small current (ASIC output cur-rent). When the driver input voltage (base resistance input) is HIGH(+3.3V), the transistor turns ON to flow a current in the arrow direction,operating the load. When the driver is ON, the driver output terminalvoltage is 0V.
(6) Toner supply motor drive circuitThe IC129 is the motor control IC, which generates the pseudo ACwaveform with the pulse signals (TM, TM-) outputted from ASIC, driv-ing the toner supply motor.
(7) Main motor drive circuitThe main motor is driven by the MMD signal from ASIC. While themain motor is rotating, the MMD signal is driven to HIGH and passedthrough IC125 to the control circuit in the main motor to rotate the mainmotor. When the main motor speed reaches the specified rpm, theMMLD signal is turned LOW and passed through IC115 to the CPU.
LOAD
+24V
ASIC/CPUOUT PUT
LOAD
24V
PGND
PGND
PGND
(TM)(TM_)
TMB_OTMA_O
(4-D3)(4-D3) (9-A1)
(9-A1)
R20547kJ
R20447kJ
+C21210u/35V
R1871kJ
R1881kJ
IC129
BA6920FP
Vcc17
GND8
Rin20
Fin18 OUT1
9
OUT25
VM16
VREF21
RNF6
PSAVE19
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC7
NC10
NC11
NC12
NC13
NC14NC15NC22NC23NC24NC25
FINFIN
C213
0.1u/50V
MMLD
ASIC
Main Motor
Control
Circuit
( Main Motor)
IC201
TD62503F
I11
O1 16
I22
O2 15
I33
I44 O3 14
I5
5 O4 13
I66 O5 12
I7
7 COM
8 O6 11
O7 10
NC
9
MMD MMD /MMD
CPU
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 10
(8) Mirror motor control circuit, Duplex motor control circuitStepping motors are employed for the mirror motor, the SPF motor,and the duplex motor. The driver for IC127 (for mirror motor) is thebipolar drive L6219DS, and the driver for IC128 (for SPF) is the uni-polar drive IC MTD1361F. For control, the SPF outputs the drive signalfrom the CPU to the IC, and the mirror outputs the drive signal to the ICwith the ASIC. They drive each motor in 1-2 phase excitement or 2-phase excitement.
Each motor switches the motor current value in each magnificationratio.
• SPF motor drive circuit
• Mirror motor drive circuit
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND PGND
24VM
5V
PGND
SPMT_2
(SPMT2)
SPMT_0SPMT_3SPMT_1
MRPS_1MRPS_2MRPS_3
(SPMT0)(SPMT3)(SPMT1)
(5-C2)(5-C2)(5-C2)
(4-D2)(4-D2)(4-D2)(4-D2)
(9-D1)(9-D1)
(9-E1)
(9-E1)
¢ U T
R199300J
C211 2200p
R191 7.5kJ
C214 2200p
R194 7.5kJ
C218
2200p
C227
OPEN
C216
OPEN
C215 OPEN
C232 OPEN
C222
2200p
R198 2.4kJ
R203 2.4kJ
R1951kJ
R2071kJ
C220
0.1u
R200620J
R2011.2kJ
R202100J
R196750J
+
C219
47u/16V
R197 1J 2W
IC128
MTD1361/F
CrA23
CrB20
VsA25
RsA3
VrefA24
VrefB19
RsB12
VsB18
In /A26
In A27
In /B17
In B16
Vmm22
OUT /A1
OUT A4
OUT /B14
OUT B11
PG15
PG28
D1
12
OP
EN
D1
13
OP
EN
D1
14
OP
EN
D1
15
OP
EN
R206 1J 2W
+
C21747u/16V
5V
24VM
24V
5V
5V
24VM
PGND
PGNDPGND PGND
24Vdup
PGND
PGND
PGND PGND
PGND
PGND
MM_PH_A
OUT_A-
MM_AI0
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0MM_BI1
MM_AI1
OUT_A+
OUT_B-
MMref0MMref1MMref2
OUT_B+
(8-C3)(8-C3)(8-C3)(8-C3)
(2-A3)(2-A3)(2-A3)
(2-A3)
(2-A3)(2-A3)
(5-C1)(5-C1)(5-C1)
CP101ICP-N38
C202820p
C203820p
C204820p
C2070.1u
C201820p
C2050.1u
+ C2061u/16V
+ C20847u/35V
D10
5O
PE
N
R1801.5kJ
R178
0.68J1W
R18230kJ
R18330kJ
R1791.5kJ
R177
0.68J1W
R186510J
R1851kJ
R1842kJ
R1811kJ
IC127
L6219DS
OUT 2A2
SENSE 23
COMP 24
OUT 2B5
GND6
GND7
I028
I129
PHASE 210
VREF 211
RC 212
VSS13RC 114VREF 115PHASE 116I1117GND18GND19I0120OUT 1B21COMP 122SENSE 123VS24
OUT 1A1
D10
6O
PE
N
D10
7O
PE
N
D10
8O
PE
N
CP102ICP-N38
C2090.1u/50V
C2100.1u/50V
CP2010603FA1.5A
CP2020603FA1.5A
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 11
(9) Operation circuita. General
The operation circuit is composed of the key matrix circuit and the dis-play matrix circuit.
b. Key matrix circuit
Select signals SELIN 1 – 3 are sent from the CPU of the MCU to theselector in the operation circuit.
The signals detecting OFF/ON of the key are sent to the CPU as KIN 1– 2.
c. Display circuit
The display is controlled by sending the data signal from the CPU ofthe MCU, the clock signals, and the latch signals from the ASIC to theLED driver in the operation circuit.
∗ The basic circuitry is the same as that of Puma.
(10) I/F circuita. General
The I/F circuit is composed of the USB driver and the IEEE1284 driver,and performs hard interface with the ASIC (MCU PWB).
b. USB circuit
With the USB driver, the differential signals (analog) of USB are con-verted into digital signal, which are sent to the ASIC. In the reverseprocedure, interface between the ASIC (engine) and the host is per-formed.
c. IEEE1284 circuit
The IEEE1284 driver is used to perform interface between the ASIC(engine) and the host.
(11) Carriage unita. General
The carriage unit is provided with the CCD PWB, the inverter PWB,and the lamps. It scans documents and transfers AD-converted imagedata to the ASIC.
b. CCD PWB
The CCD on the CCD PWB employs the color image sensor uPD8861of 5400 pixels x 3 lines, and scans documents in the main scanningdirection in the resolution of 600dpi/US letter size.
Image data scanned by the CCD are inputted to the AFE (AD9826),and subject to CDS, amplification, and AD-conversion. Then digitaldata are outputted to the MCU PWB and to the ASIC, which performsimage process of the digital data.
c. Lamp inverter PWB
The transformer is controlled by the lamp control signal from the MCUPWB. The transformer output controls lighting of the cool cathode raytube.
B. DC power circuitThe DC power circuit directly rectifies the AC power and performsswitching-conversion with the DC/DC converter circuit, and rectifiesand smoothes again to generate a DC voltage.
The constant voltage control circuit is of +5VEN. +24V and +12V are ofthe non-control system by winding from the +5VEN winding. As shownin fig (1), +24V, +12V, and +5V are provided with the ON/OFF functionby external signals. +3.3V is outputted from +5VEN to the regulator IC.
Refer to the block diagram, fig (1).
fig (1) Block diagram
USB driverIC401
USB
connector
D -
D+
OE, RCV, VP, VMSuspend, VMOVPO
ASIC
Centronics
connector
IEEE1284
driver
IC403
ASIC
Noise filtercircuit
Rush currentprevention circuit
Rectifying/smoothing
circuit
Inverter circuit(Flyback converter system)
Rectifying/smoothing circuit (Semiconductor switch)
Rectifying/smoothing circuit
Rectifying/smoothing circuit
+12V regulator IC(with ON/OFF function)
Overcurrentprotection circuit
Controlcircuit
Constant-voltagedetection circuit
(Semiconductor switch)
+3.3Vregulator IC
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 12
(1) Noise filter circuitThe filter circuit is composed of L and C. It reduces common noisesand normal mode noises generated from the AC line.
The common noise means that generated in each line for GND. Itsnoise component is delivered through C001, C003, and C007 to GND.
The normal noise means that overlapped in the AC line or the outputline. It is attenuated by C002, L001, C006, and L002. Refer to fig (2).
fig (2) Noise filter circuit
(2) Rush current prevention circuit and rectifying/smoothing circuit
fig (3) Rush current prevention, rectifying/smoothing circuit
Since the AC power is directly rectified, if there were not this rush cur-rent prevention resistor (TH001), an extremely large rush currentwould flow due to a charging current flowing through the smoothingcapacitor C010 when turning on the power.
To prevent against this, the rush current prevention resistor TH001 isprovided between the rectifying diode D002 and the smoothing diodeC010, suppressing a rush current.
The rectifying/smoothing circuit rectifies a 50/60Hz AC voltage with therectifying circuit, and smoothes it with the smoothing capacitor C010.
(3) Inverter and control circuit (Flyback converter system)
fig (4) Inverter and control circuit
This circuit is one-stone separate excitation DC-DC converter calledflyback converter, as shown in fig (4).
When an electromotive voltage of IC is applied through D012, R005,and R006 to IC002, IC002 oscillates to conduct Q001.
As a result, a voltage is applied to the primary winding of the convertertransformer (T001) and at the same time a voltage is generated in thedriving winding of IC002 to operate IC002. Then IC002 turns ON/OFFQ001 at the frequency of about 70KHz determined by R016.
Under the ON state, the voltage in the secondary winding is reversedto the diode D103 and no current flows through the secondary windingof T001.
Under the OFF state, the current flowing through the primary winding isin the same direction as the primary winding, conducting D103 andtransmitting energy to the secondary winding. Refer to fig (4).
fig (5) Operation waveform of the flyback converter
T001D103
R10
9R
111PC
002
IC10
2
Q001
R012
R006R005
R013C013
R012
AC
8 7 6IC002
R016
5
1 2 3 4
PC002
C010
secondarywindingvoltage
AL-1551CS ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 13
The control circuit is subject to negative feedback from the secondaryside as shown in fig (4). A photo coupler (PC002) is employed to insu-late between the primary side and the secondary side to feed back thecontrol signal to the primary side.
When the output voltage is increased by energy transmission fromT001, the voltage detected by R109 and R111 is compared with thereference voltage of IC102. When it exceeds the reference voltage, thecurrent flowing through IC102 (that is, the photo diode current ofPC002) is increased and transmitted to the primary side. Then thepotential at the feedback pin (2 pin) of IC102 is decreased to controlQ001. Therefore, the change in the output voltage on the secondaryside is passed through IC102 and PC002 to control Q001, stabilizingthe output voltage.
(4) Overcurrent protection circuit (Primary side)The inverter circuit of the primary side is connected with the currentdetection resistor R102. When an overcurrent occurs in the secondaryside, the current flowing through the primary side inverter Q001 isincreased. The current is detected by R012, and passed through R013to IC701 overcurrent restricting pin (3 pin) to turn OFF Q002, shuttingoff all power. To resupply the power, turn off and on the power. Referto fig (4).
(5) Rectifying/smoothing circuit (+5V)
fig (6) Rectifying/smoothing circuit
The high frequency pulse generated by the inverter circuit isdecreased by the converter transformer, rectified by the high frequencydiode D103, and smoothed by C103 and C104.
fig (7) +5V rectifying/smoothing circuit voltage waveform
Voltage waveform
Voltage waveform
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 1
[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
MC
U P
WB
(C
PU
SE
CT
ION
)
1. M
CU
PW
B
C126
47p
1 2
BR
116
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
R107
*4 21
BR
119
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR12233J 1
234
8765
BR12533J
1234
8765
R103
*1 21
X101
HC
-49U
/S19.6
608M
Hz
12
R108
10kJ
21
BR12433J
1234
8765
R114
11kF
21
BR
118
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
R104
*3 21
R102
*2 21
BR12333J 1
234
8765
BR
120
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
R106
0J
21
C10
410
0p
1 2
C106
12p
12
C1140.1u1 2
C1150.1u1 2
C1110.1u1 2
C122OPEN1 2
C119OPEN1 2
C105
100p
1 2
C109
10u/1
6V
1 2
+
C1120.1u1 2
C120OPEN1 2
C124
0.1
u
1 2
C1100.1u1 2
C117OPEN1 2
C1130.1u1 2
C103
*512
R109
OP
EN
21
C125
22000p
1 2
C123OPEN1 2
C102
*61
2
R117
10kF
21
C108
0.1
u
1 2
C121OPEN1 2
R105
0J
21
C118OPEN1 2
R112
10kJ
21
BR
114
10kJ
1234
8765
L101
ZJS
R5101-2
23
1
2
3
BR
108
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
115
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
107
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
110
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
C128
0.1
u
1 2
R111
10kJ
21
BR
117
10kJ
1234
8765
BR
109
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
105
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR10110kJ1234
8765
R101
OP
EN
21
IC102
24W
C02
or H
T24L
C02
E0
1E
12
E2
3V
SS
4S
DA
5S
CL
6W
C7
VC
C8
BR10210kJ1234
8765
BR10310kJ1234
8765
BR
106
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
104
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
IC101
P2010/P
LL701-0
1
Xin
1X
out
2F
S0
3V
ss4
SS
on
5M
OD
OU
T6
SR
07
VD
D8
BR11210kJ
1234
8765
R271
10kJ
21
IC103
H8S
/2320
HD
6412
320V
F25
(H8S
/232
0)
P35/S
CK
164
P34/S
CK
063
P33/R
xD1
62
P32/R
xD0
61
P31/T
xD1
60
P30/T
xD0
59
VC
C58
PD
7/D
15
57
PD
6/D
14
56
PD
5/D
13
55
PD
4/D
12
54
Vss
53
PD
3/D
11
52
PD
2/D
10
51
PD
1/D
950
PD
0/D
849
PE
7/D
748
PE
6/D
647
PE
5/D
546
PE
4/D
445
Vss
44
PE
3/D
343
PE
2/D
242
PE
1/D
141
PE
0/D
040
VC
C39
AV
cc103
Vre
f104
P40/A
N0
105
P41/A
N1
106
P42/A
N2
107
P43/A
N3
108
P44/A
N4
109
P45/A
N5
110
P46/A
N6/D
A0
111
P47/A
N7/D
A1
112
AV
ss113
Vss
114
P17/P
O15/T
IOC
B2/T
CLK
D115
P16/P
O14/T
IOC
A2
116
P15/P
O13/T
IOC
B1/T
CLK
C117
P14/P
O12/T
IOC
A1
118
P13/P
O11/T
IOC
D0/T
CLK
B119
P12/P
O10/T
IOC
C0/T
CLK
A120
P11/P
O9/T
IOC
B0/D
AC
K1
121
P10/P
O8/T
IOC
A0/D
AC
K0
122
MD
0123
MD
1124
MD
2125
PG
0/C
AS
126
PG
1/C
S3
127
PG
2/C
S2
128
PG3/CS1 1
PG4/CS0 2Vss 3
NC 4
VCC 5
PC0/A0 6
PC1/A1 7
PC2/A2 8
PC3/A3 9Vss 10
PC4/A4 11
PC5/A5 12PC6/A6 13
PC7/A7 14PB0/A8 15
PB1/A9 16
PB2/A10 17PB3/A11 18
Vss 19
PB4/A12 20
PB5/A13 21PB6/A14 22PB7/A15 23
PA0/A16 24PA1/A17 25
PA2/A18 26
PA3/A19 27Vss 28
PA4/A20/IRQ4 29
PA5/A21/IRQ5 30
PA6/A22/IRQ6 31
PA7/A23/IRQ7 32
P67// CS7IRQ3 33
P66// CS6IRQ2 34
Vss 35Vss 36
P65/IRQ1 37
P64/IRQ0 38
P53/ADTRG102P52/SCK2101
Vss100Vss99
P51/RxD298P50/TxD297
PF0/BREQ96PF1/BACK95
PF2// WAIT/BREQO LCAS94PF3/LWR93PF4/HWR92
PF5/RD91PF6/AS90
VCC89PF7/088
Vss87EXTAL86
XTAL85VCC84
STBY83NMI82
RES81WDTOVF80
P20/PO0/TIOCA379P21/PO1/YICOB378P22/PO2/TIOCC377P23/PO3/TIOCD376P24/PO4/TIOCA475 P25/PO5/TIOCB474P26/PO6/TIOCA573P27/PO7/TIOCB572
P63/TEND171P62/DREQ170
P61// TEND0CS569Vss68Vss67
P60// DREQ0CS466Vss65
BR12133J
1234
8765
IC104
M51957B
FP
NC
8
GN
D4
VC
C7
NC
1IN
2N
C3
Cd
5O
UT
6
C107
0.1
u
1 2C
101
0.1
u
1 2
R270
OP
EN
21
R115
10kJ
21
R118
10kJ
21R116
OP
EN 2
1
R276
33J
21
BR
111
10kJ
1234
8765
R277
33J
21
R278
100J
21
R283
10kJ
21
R284
10kJ
21R285
33J 2
1
R291
1kJ
21
D5
CP
UC
LK
(NC
)
D0
SP
MT
1
RY
/BY
CC
D_T
G
D7
LWR
D12
/CS
0
/CS
2
RESETOUT
D4
LWR
D8
D15
/CS
2
/SC
AN
SP
/TR
AN
SS
TD
10
/CS
0
D3
MT
_H
OM
E
(FW
)
D7
SC
L
/CS
1
FAX
ST
S(N
C)
/SC
AN
ST
/PR
INT
ST
D6
CP
U_
SY
NC
/PR
INT
ST
D13
MT
_H
OM
E
D5
D0
CC
D_
TG
AR
B_
INT
SD
A
D12
CPUNRST
D9
SP
MT
0
D11
SP
MT
2
/SC
AN
SP
D10
(FW
)
SP
MT
3
CPUCLK(NC)
FAX
ST
S(N
C)
D4
D2
/TR
AN
SS
T
CP
U_S
YN
C
D1
D9
SC
L
D2
AR
B_
INT
D14
SP
MT
1
SP
MT
3
/CS
1
SD
A
D3
FAX
CM
D(N
C)
A20
D6
D14
/SC
AN
ST
D8
D1
D15
SP
MT
0
SP
MT
2
FAX
CM
D(N
C)
D13
D11
RY
/BY
A0
A5
A2
A4
A11
A19
A13
A3
A8
A10
A7
A12
A16
A14
A18
A1
A15
A17
A6
A9
A2
0
CP
UN
RS
T
RE
SE
TO
UT
HW
R
HW
RR
D
RD
RE
SE
TO
UT
1
RE
SE
TO
UT
1
VC
C3
VC
C3
CP
U3.3
CP
U3.3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
/AS
IC_R
ST
A[1
9..0]
mt_
at_
ho
me
(SIN
1)
RY
/BY
RT
H
SD
A
TM
CLK
(PS
W)
/CS
0
/CS
2
PO
FF
DM
T3
SP
MT
1
DM
T0
DM
T2
/SC
AN
ST
SE
LIN
1
SE
LIN
3
CC
D_
TG
/PR
INT
ST
CP
U_
SY
NC
AR
B_
INT
SC
L
(SIN
3)
(KIN
1)
D[1
5..0]
(SIN
2)
PS
L
(US
BIN
)
TM
EN
(KIN
2)
SP
MT
0
/CS
1
PM
CLK
SP
MT
2/M
IRC
NT
DM
T1
/SC
AN
SP
/TR
AN
SS
T
(SP
PD
)
SP
MT
3
SE
LIN
2
(FW
)
/LW
R
TxD
1
/RD
/HW
R
ON
L
D_C
ON
TB
EO
CP
UN
RS
T
/CL_R
ES
ET
Spre
adin
g R
ange :
+/-
1.2
5%
R104(*
3)
OP
EN
0J
R103(*
1)
OP
EN
680J
R107(*
4)
22J
OP
EN
R102(*
2)
0J
OP
EN
C103(*
5)
C102(*
6)
22pF
22pF
15pF
15pF
*R102,R
103,C
102, and C
103 a
re tem
tativ
e
(3-A
2)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
2)(3
-A2)
(4-C
3)
(4-C
3)
(4-C
3)
(9-B
1)
(9-B
1)
(5-E
3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
2)
(4-C
2)
(4-C
2)
(4-C
2)
(4-C
2)
(8-C
3)
(8-D
3)
(2-A
1)
(3-A
2)
(3-C
2)
(2-D
1)
(2-A
1)
(3-A
3)
(2-A
1)
(4-D
4)
(8-C
2)
(7-E
1)
(2-A
1)
(2-B
4)
(7-E
1)
(2-A
2)
(3-A
1)
(6-D
3)
(6-D
3)
(6-D
4)
(6-D
4)
(5-B
2)
(5-B
1)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
2)
(4-D
4)
(4-D
4)
(3-B
2)
(9-B
1)(2
-D1)
(9-B
3)
(8-A
2)
(8-C
4)
CP
U p
ort
sele
ctio
n o
f a /A
SIC
_R
ST
outp
ut
PF
633J
mounte
d o
n R
116 a
nd R
285 a
re O
PE
NP
34
33J
mounte
d o
n R
285 a
nd R
116 a
re O
PE
N
(8-C
1)
(3-B
2)
When IC
101 is
,m
ounte
dN
OT
mounte
d
1/9
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 2
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
MC
U P
WB
(A
SIC
SE
CT
ION
)2/
9
L110
ZJS
R51
01-2
23
1
2
3
C16
40.
1u
1 2
C16322000p
1 2
C16
512
p
1 2
L113
ZJS
R51
01-2
23
1
2
3
C1680.1u
C16922000p
1 2
1 2
1 2
C16
712
p
C13
9
47u/
16V
1 2+
L103
ZJS
R51
01-2
231
2
3
C1290.1u
C1330.1u
C1310.1u
C1320.1u
C1340.1u
C1350.1u
C1360.1u
C1370.1u
C1380.1u1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2C1410.1u
C1440.1u
C1420.1u
C1430.1u
C1400.1u
C1450.1u
C1460.1u
C1470.1u
C1480.1u
C1490.1u
C1500.1u
C1570.1u
C1540.1u
C1590.1u
C1580.1u
C1550.1u
C1510.1u
C1530.1u
C1520.1u
C1560.1u
C1620.1u
C1600.1u
C1610.1u
R11933J21
R12
133
J2
1
R12
710
kJ2
1
R12
810
kJ2
1
X10
2
OS
C-1
124
MH
z
N.C
.1
VC
C8
OU
TP
UT
5
GN
D4
X10
3
OS
C-1
113
.986
7MH
zN.C
.1
VC
C8
OU
TP
UT
5
GN
D4
BR
134
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
142
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
143
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
144
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
147
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
149
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
151
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
131
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5B
R13
233
J1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
136
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
138
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
140
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
141
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR12633J 1234
8765
1234
8765
1234
8765
1234
8765
1234
8765
BR12733J
BR12833J
BR12933J
BR13033J
BR
153
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
154
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
155
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
145
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
148
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
150
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
152
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
133
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
135
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
137
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
139
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
146
10kJ
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
R12
210
kJ
R12
9O
PE
N
R12
310
kJ
R13
0O
PE
NR
131
OP
EN
R12
410
kJ
R13
2O
PE
N
R12
510
kJR
126
10kJ
21
21
21
21
21 21
21
21
21
21
21
R13
3O
PE
N
R12
010
0J2
1
IC10
7N
C7S
T08
M5X
1 24 C17
00.
1u
1 2
C16
647
p
1 2
C1300.1u
R25
433
J2
1C
315
47p
12
R25
533
J2
1C
316
47p
12
R25
633
J2
1C
317
47p
12
R25
733
J2
1C
318
47p
12
R25
833
J2
1C
319
47p
12
R25
933
J2
1C
320
47p
12
R26
033
J2
1
C32
147
p12
R26
133
J21
R26
233
J21
R26
7
10J
21
R18
910
kJ2
1
IC10
6
HG
73C
119H
F
Jag
uar
AS
IC w
ith
ou
t P
CI
CPU_AD6 1CPU_AD5 2CPU_AD4 3CPU_AD3 4
GND(CORE/DC) 8
CPU_AD2 6CPU_AD1 7
VCC(CORE/DC) 5
CPU_AD0 9SGS 10SRRC 11SPUS 12SPPS 13MRPS1 14MRPS2 15OPE_LATCH 16OP_DATA 17VCC(AC) 18OP_CLK 19VFMCNT 20GND(AC) 21VFM 22TC 23GRIDL 24MC 25MRPS3 26Y3 27
BIAS 28LDEN 29PMD 30GND(CORE/DC) 31MMD 32
VCC(CORE/DC) 34MPFS 35CPFS2 36CPFS1 37POFFR 38RRS 39PR 40HL 41
TMON 42TM_ 43VCC(AC) 44TM 45MIRON 46GND(AC) 47SPFON 48MIRCNT 49
PCL_S_PRINT 51FAX_S_PRINT 52ES_S_PRINT 53PRAREAEN 54TDI 55
VCC(CORE/DC) 57GND(CORE/DC) 56
PFCLK0 58RESET# 59GND(AC) 60TRST 61TCK 62
TMS 63VCC(AC) 64
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
086
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
184
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
283
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
381
VC
C(C
OR
E/D
C)
69
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
480
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
579
GN
D(C
OR
E/D
C)
72
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
678
IE12
84_P
AR
AD
777
IE12
84_R
EV
#76
IE12
84_I
NIT
68
IE12
84_S
LCT
IN#
67
IE12
84_A
UTO
FD
#66
IE12
84_S
TB
#65
IE12
84_A
CK
#74
IE12
84_B
US
Y73
VC
C(A
C)
82
IE12
84_P
E71
IE12
84_F
AU
LT#
75
GN
D(A
C)
85
IE12
84_S
LCT
70
VP
OU
T93
VM
OU
T92
SU
SP
EN
D87
VM
IN88
VP
IN89
RC
V90
OE
N91
TM
2_15
M94
VC
C(P
LL)
95G
ND
(PLL
)96
VC
C(P
LL)
97G
ND
(PLL
)98
PF
CLK
99V
CC
(CO
RE
/DC
)10
0G
ND
(CO
RE
/DC
)10
1R
AM
_DAT
A0
102
RA
M_D
ATA
110
3R
AM
_DAT
A2
104
GN
D(A
C)
105
RA
M_D
ATA
310
6R
AM
_DAT
A4
107
VC
C(A
C)
108
RA
M_D
ATA
510
9R
AM
_DAT
A6
110
GN
D(C
OR
E/D
C)
111
RA
M_D
ATA
711
2R
AM
_DAT
A15
113
RA
M_D
ATA
1411
4V
CC
(CO
RE
/DC
)11
5R
AM
_DAT
A13
116
RA
M_D
ATA
1211
7G
ND
(CO
RE
/DC
)11
8R
AM
_DAT
A11
119
RA
M_D
ATA
1012
0V
CC
(CO
RE
/DC
)12
1R
AM
_DAT
A9
122
RA
M_D
ATA
812
3G
ND
(AC
)12
4R
AM
_CLK
125
RA
M_C
KE
126
RA
M_W
DE
#12
7V
CC
(AC
)12
8TM2_24M192
SFCLK191GND(AC)190
AFP_DATA0189GND(AC)188
AFP_DATA1187AFP_DATA2186
VCC(AC)185AFP_DATA3184AFP_DATA4183
GND(CORE/DC)182AFP_DATA5181AFP_DATA6180AFP_DATA7179
VCC(CORE/DC)178MTR_AT_HOME177
AFP_AFESCK176GND(CORE/DC)175
AFP_AFESEN174AFP_ADCCLK173
VCC(CORE/DC)172CCD_PH1171GND(AC)170
AFP_AFESDI169CCD_PH2168
AFP_BSMP167VCC(AC)166
CCD_PHCLB165CCD_PHRB164AFP_VSMP163
GND(CORE/DC)162CCD_TG161
AFP_OBE160VCC(CORE/DC)159
CL158TDO157
RAM_MAD3156RAM_MAD2155RAM_MAD1154
VCC(CORE/DC)153RAM_MAD0152
RAM_MAD10151RAM_MAD4150
GND(CORE/DC)149RAM_MAD5148RAM_MAD6147
VCC(AC)146RAM_MAD7145RAM_MAD8144
GND(AC)143RAM_MAD9142
RAM_MAD11141VCC(CORE/DC)140
RAM_MAD12139RAM_DQM1138RAM_DQM0137
GND(CORE/DC)136RAM_BANK1135RAM_BANK0134
VCC(CORE/DC)133RAM_CS#132
RAM_RAS#131RAM_CAS#130
GND(CORE/DC)129C
PU
_AD
725
6C
PU
_AD
825
5C
PU
_SY
NC
#25
4A
RB
_IN
TR
253
GN
D(A
C)
252
ME
M_I
NT
R25
1C
PU
CS
#25
0V
CC
(AC
)24
9C
PU
_DAT
A0
248
CP
U_D
ATA
124
7C
PU
_DAT
A2
246
CP
U_D
ATA
324
5V
CC
(CO
RE
/DC
)24
4C
PU
_DAT
A4
243
CP
U_D
ATA
524
2C
PU
_DAT
A6
241
CP
U_D
ATA
724
0G
ND
(CO
RE
/DC
)23
9C
PU
_DAT
A8
238
CP
U_D
ATA
923
7V
CC
(AC
)23
6C
PU
_DAT
A10
235
CP
U_D
ATA
1123
4C
PU
_DAT
A12
233
CP
U_D
ATA
1323
2
SC
AN
SP
217
CP
U_D
ATA
1423
1C
PU
_DAT
A15
230
TM
CLK
225
TM
EN
221
GN
D(C
OR
E/D
C)
226
PR
INT
ST
#22
0T
RA
NS
ST
#21
9
VC
C(C
OR
E/D
C)
223
SC
AN
ST
#21
8
CP
UR
D#
216
CP
UW
R#
215
TE
ST
PIN
022
9T
ES
TP
IN1
228
TE
ST
PIN
222
7
TE
ST
PIN
322
4
TE
ST
PIN
422
2
LEN
D#
214
GN
D(A
C)
213
LD#
212
SY
NC
#21
1V
CC
(AC
)21
0M
TR
_Y2
209
MT
R_I
2220
8M
TR
_I12
207
MT
R_I
0220
6V
CC
(CO
RE
/DC
)20
5M
TR
_PH
AS
E2
204
MT
R_I
2120
3M
TR
_I11
202
MT
R_I
0120
1G
ND
(CO
RE
/DC
)20
0M
TR
_PH
AS
E1
199
MT
R_Y
119
8V
CC
(CO
RE
/DC
)19
7
GN
D(P
LL)
195
VC
C(P
LL)
196
GN
D(P
LL)
193
VC
C(P
LL)
194
GND(CORE/DC) 33
GND(CORE/DC) 50
R27
9O
PE
N
R28
0O
PE
N
21
A6A5A4
A3A2
A1
A9
A8
D15
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
AC
KB
US
YP
ES
LCT
INIT
SLC
TIN
AU
TOF
DS
TB
PAR
AD
7PA
RA
D6
PAR
AD
5PA
RA
D4
PAR
AD
3PA
RA
D2
PAR
AD
1PA
RA
D0
RE
V
INIT
SLC
TIN
AU
TOF
DS
TB
AC
KB
US
YP
E
FAU
LT
SLC
T
FAU
LTR
EV
PAR
AD
7PA
RA
D6
PAR
AD
5PA
RA
D4
PAR
AD
3PA
RA
D2
PAR
AD
1PA
RA
D0
SU
SP
EN
DV
MIN
RA
MD
B0
RA
MD
B1
RA
MD
B2
RA
MD
B3
RA
MD
B4
RA
MD
B5
RA
MD
B6
RA
MD
B7
RA
MD
B15
RA
MD
B14
RA
MD
B13
RA
MD
B12
RA
MD
B11
RA
MD
B10
RA
MD
B9
RA
MD
B8
RA
MD
B0
RA
MD
B1
RA
MD
B2
RA
MD
B3
RA
MD
B4
RA
MD
B5
RA
MD
B6
RA
MD
B7
RA
MD
B15
RA
MD
B14
RA
MD
B13
RA
MD
B12
RA
MD
B11
RA
MD
B10
RA
MD
B9
RA
MD
B8
MAD12MAD11MAD9MAD8
MAD7MAD6MAD5MAD4
MAD10MAD0MAD1MAD2
MAD3POFFR
TMON
AF
E_D
B0
AF
E_D
B7
AF
E_D
B6
AF
E_D
B5
AF
E_D
B4
AF
E_D
B3
AF
E_D
B2
AF
E_D
B1
VP
OU
TV
MO
UT
SU
SP
EN
DV
MIN
VP
INR
CV
VP
INR
CV
VM
OU
TV
PO
UT
MM
_AI0
MM
_AI1
MM
_AI2
MM
_BI0
MM
_BI1
MM
_BI2
D14
ES_S_PRTFAX_S_PRTPCL_S_PRT
ES
_S_P
RT
FAX
_S_P
RT
PC
L_S
_PR
T
A7
MM
_AI0
MM
_AI2
MM
_AI1
MM
_BI0
MM
_BI1
MM
_BI2
PO
FF
R
TS
P0
TS
P1
TS
P2
TS
P3
TS
P4
TS
P0
TS
P1
TS
P2
TS
P3
TS
P4
TM
ONVC
C3
G3.
3V
G3.
3V
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
5V
5V
/LW
R
JTG
_TD
O
MA
D[1
2..0
]
DQ
M1
DQ
M0
BA
NK
1B
AN
K0
/SD
CS
/SD
RA
S/S
DC
AS
CL
CC
D_T
G
VS
AM
P
CC
D_R
S
CC
D_C
P
BS
AM
P
CC
D_P
HI2
AF
E_S
DI
CC
D_P
HI1
AD
CLK
AF
E_S
EN
AF
E_S
CK
mt_
at_h
ome
AF
E_D
B[7
..0]
MM
_Y1
MM
_PH
_A
MM
_AI0
MM
_AI1
MM
_PH
_B
MM
_BI0
MM
_BI1
MM
_Y2
/LE
ND
/RD
/SC
AN
SP
/SC
AN
ST
/TR
AN
SS
T/P
RIN
TS
TT
ME
N
TM
CLK
/CS
2
AR
B_I
NT
CP
U_S
YN
C
A[1
9..0
]
SGS
/RE
V
/INIT
JTG
_TM
SJT
G_T
CK
CP
UN
RS
T/A
SIC
_RS
TJT
G_T
DI
/AC
KB
US
YP
E
/FA
ULT
SLC
T
VP
OU
TV
MO
UT
SU
SP
EN
D
OE
NR
CV
/SLC
TIN
/AU
TOF
D/S
TB
VM
INV
PIN
/SD
WD
ES
DC
KE
SD
CLK
SRRCSPUSSPFS
MRPS1
OP_LATCHOP_DATA
VFMCNT
MRPS2
VFMTC
GRIDLMC
MRPS3
BIASLDEN
MM_Y3
PMD
MMD
RRS
HLPR
CPFS1
MPFSCPFS2
TM_
SPFON
TMMIRON
MIRCNT
OP_CLK
D[1
5..0
]
PAR
AD
[7..0
]
RA
MD
B[1
5..0
]
(/S
YN
C)
/VID
EO
(8-C
1)
(1-D
2),(
8-D
2)
(8-D
2)
(8-D
2)
(8-D
2)
(8-D
2)
(8-D
2)
(8-D
2)
(8-E
2)
(8-E
2)
(8-E
2)
(8-E
2)
(8-C
2)(8
-D2) (5
-B1)
(5-B
1)
(6-B
3)
(6-B
3)(6
-B3)
(6-C
3)
(6-C
3)(6
-C3)
(4-D
4)
(9-A
2)
(1-A
2)
(1-A
2)
(1-B
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-A
2)
(1-D
2)
(5-B
1)
(1-B
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-A
2)
(1-D
2)(1
-D2)
(1-A
2)
(1-C
1)
(5-A2)(5-A2)(5-A2)(5-A2)(5-B2)(5-B2)
(5-B3)
(5-B3)(5-B4)(5-B4)(5-B4)(5-B2)(5-B1)
(4-C3)(4-C3)
(4-C3)
(4-C3)
(4-C3)(4-C2)
(4-C2)(4-C2)
(5-B4)(5-B2)(5-B1)
(5-B1)
(5-B2)
(5-B3)(5-B3)(5-B3)
(5-B3)(5-B3)
(1-B
1)
(9-B
2)(9
-B2)
(9-B
2)
(8-A
2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
1)(8
-B1)
(8-B
1)(8
-B1)
(3-E
3)(3
-E2)
(3-E
2)
(3-E
2)
(3-E
1)
(3-D
2)(3
-D2)
(3-D
2)(3
-D2)
(3-D
2)(3
-D2)
(3-D
2)
(9-B
2)
(1-B
1)
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 3
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
MC
U P
WB
(M
EM
OR
Y S
EC
TIO
N)
3/9
R13
8O
PE
N 21
C17
422
u/16
V
1 2+
C17
60.
1u
1 2
R13
710
kJ
21C
177
0.1u
1 2
C17
80.
1u
1 2
C17
90.
1u
1 2
C18
00.
1u
1 2
C18
10.
1u
1 2
C18
20.
1u
1 2
C18
30.
1u
1 2
IC11
0
SD
RA
M (
16bi
t x 4
bank
)
A0
23
A1
24
A2
25
A3
26A
429
A5
30A
631
A7
32A
833
A9
34
A10
22
BA
020
DQ
02
DQ
14
DQ
25
DQ
37
DQ
48
DQ
510
DQ
611
DQ
713
DQ
842
DQ
944
DQ
1045
DQ
1147
DQ
1248
DQ
1350
DQ
1451
DQ
1553
VC
C1
VC
C27
VS
S54
VS
S28
VC
CQ
9
VS
S41
VC
CQ
43
VC
CQ
49V
SS
Q6
VS
SQ
12
VS
SQ
46
VS
SQ
52
LDQ
M15
UD
QM
39W
E16
CA
S17
RA
S18
CS
19C
LKE
37C
LK38
NC
40
NC
36
VC
CQ
3
VC
C14
BA
121
A11
35
R13
9O
PE
N2
1
C17
30.
1u
1 2
R26
9
10kJ
21
IC11
2 W24
L010
AI/O0
13A
012
I/O1
14A
111
I/O2
15A
210
I/O3
17A
39
I/O4
18A
48
I/O5
19A
57
I/O6
20A
66
I/O7
21A
75
A8
27
A9
26
A10
23
A11
25
A12
4
A13
28
A14
3
CS
122
OE
24
WE
29
VD
D32
GN
D16
CS
230
A15
31
A16
2
NC
1
C32
6O
PE
N
1 2
C32
7
OP
EN
1 2
C32
4O
PE
N
1 2
C32
5O
PE
N
1 2
R2870J
21
R28610kJ
21
IC11
1
LH28
F40
0BV
E
A0
25A
124
A2
23A
322
A4
21A
520
A6
19A
718
A8
8A
97
A10
6A
115
A12
4A
133
A14
2A
151
A16
48
A17
17
DQ
029
DQ
131
DQ
233
DQ
335
DQ
438
DQ
540
DQ
642
DQ
744
DQ
830
DQ
932
DQ
1034
DQ
1136
DQ
1239
DQ
1341
DQ
1443
DQ
1545
NC
9
NC
10
NC
16
GN
D46
GN
D27
VC
C37
VP
P13
BY
TE
47
OE
28
CE
26
WE
11
RP
12
WP
14
RY
/BY
15
R288OPEN
21 R289OPEN
21
RA
MD
B0
RA
MD
B9
RA
MD
B10
RA
MD
B11
RA
MD
B12
RA
MD
B13
RA
MD
B14
RA
MD
B15
RA
MD
B7
RA
MD
B8
RA
MD
B3
RA
MD
B1
RA
MD
B5
RA
MD
B6
RA
MD
B2
RA
MD
B4
MA
D8
MA
D9
MA
D4
MA
D5
MA
D11
MA
D1
MA
D0
MA
D10
MA
D7
MA
D12
A17
A1R
DZ
MA
D3
MA
D2
MA
D6
CS
1ZR
DZ
HW
RZ
A5
A4
A2
A7
A1
A6
A8
A19
A2
A8
A12
A4
A3
A11
A3A16
A1
A13
A12
A11
A15
A10
A14
A10
A9
A6
A7
A17A14
A15
A13
A5
A18A9
A16
A0
HW
RZ
D12
D12
D1
D8
D4
D6
D9
D11
D14
D15
D11
D7
D3
D8
D5
D10
D10
D2
D14
D9
D13
D0
D13
D15
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
/CS
0
MA
D[1
2..0
]
BA
NK
0B
AN
K1
/SD
CS
/SD
WD
E/S
DC
AS
/SD
RA
S
DQ
M0
DQ
M1
SD
CLK
SD
CK
E
D[1
5..0
]
RA
MD
B[1
5..0
]
/CS
1/R
D/H
WR
A[1
9..0
]
RY
/BY
CP
UN
RS
T
(1-C
1)
(1-D
2)
(1-A
2)
(2-D
3)
(2-D
3)(2
-D3)
(2-D
3)(2
-D4)
(2-D
4)(2
-D4)
(2-D
4)(2
-D4)
(2-D
4)
(2-D
4)
(2-D
4)
12/1
3/14
CP
M
Mod
el
64M
b(1M
x16b
itx4b
ank)
SD
RA
M
Ven
dor/
Type
HY
57V
6416
20H
GT-
P(H
ynda
i) MT
48LC
4M16
A2T
G-7
5(M
icro
n) K4S
6416
32F
-TC
75(S
amsu
ng)
W98
6416
DH
-7(W
inbo
nd)
15C
PM
128M
b(2M
x16b
itx4b
ank)
MT
48LC
8M16
A2T
G-7
5(M
icro
n) HY
57V
2816
20AT
(Hyn
dai)
K4S
2816
32D
-TC
75(S
amsu
ng)
W98
1216
BH
-75(
Win
bond
)
(1-A
2)(1
-B3)
(1-B
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-B
1)
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 4
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
MC
U P
WB
(D
RIV
ER
SE
CT
ION
1)
4/9
C18
4
0.1u
C19
50.
1u
1 2C1890.1u
21
21
21
C190100p
C191100p
C192100p
R14
610
kJ
21
R14
710
kJ
BR
156
10J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
157
10J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
158
10J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
BR
159
10kJ
1234
8765
IC11
8
74LC
X24
4
1A1
2
1A2
4
1A3
6
1A4
8
2A1
11
2A2
13
2A3
15
2A4
17
1G1
2G19
1Y1
18
1Y2
16
1Y3
14
1Y4
12
2Y1
9
2Y2
7
2Y3
5
2Y4
3
VC
C20
GN
D10
IC11
6
74V
HC
T24
4
1A1
2
1A2
4
1A3
6
1A4
8
2A1
11
2A2
13
2A3
15
2A4
17
1G1
2G19
1Y1
18
1Y2
16
1Y3
14
1Y4
12
2Y1
9
2Y2
7
2Y3
5
2Y4
3
VC
C20
GN
D10
C18
5
0.1u
21
R14
4
10J
21
C18
6
33p
C18
7
0.1u
R14
5
10J
21
C18
8
33p
C19
3
0.1u
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
R14
9
10J
21
C19
4
33p
R14
810
kJ
IC11
4
74H
C15
1
D0
4
D1
3
D2
2
D3
1
D4
15
D5
14
D6
13
D7
12
A11
B10
C9
G7
W6
Y5
VC
C16
GN
D8
IC11
3
74LC
X24
4
1A1
2
1A2
4
1A3
6
1A4
8
2A1
11
2A2
13
2A3
15
2A4
17
1G1
2G19
1Y1
18
1Y2
16
1Y3
14
1Y4
12
2Y1
9
2Y2
7
2Y3
5
2Y4
3
VC
C20
GN
D10
R14
110
kJR
140
10kJ
1 2 1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
IC11
5
74H
C15
1
D0
4
D1
3
D2
2
D3
1
D4
15
D5
14
D6
13
D7
12
A11
B10
C9
G7
W6
Y5
VC
C16
GN
D8
IC11
7
74H
C15
1
D0
4
D1
3
D2
2
D3
1
D4
15
D5
14
D6
13
D7
12
A11
B10
C9
G7
W6
Y5
VC
C16
GN
D8
R26
310
kJ
R26
610
kJ
5V
VC
C3 V
CC
3
5V 5V 5V5V
VC
C3
5V
5V
(KIN
1)(K
IN2)
(FW
)
(SIN
1)(S
IN2)
(SIN
3)
(SE
LIN
1)(S
ELI
N2)
(SE
LIN
3)(O
P_C
LK)
(OP
_DAT
A)
(OP
_LAT
CH
)
(SP
MT
0)
US
BIN
SIN
1S
IN2
SIN
3
KIN
1K
IN2
SE
LIN
1S
ELI
N2
SE
LIN
3O
P_C
LKO
P_D
ATA
OP
_LAT
CH
MIR
CN
T
SP
MT
0S
PM
T1
SP
MT
3M
IRO
NS
PF
ON
(SP
MT
1)(S
PM
T2)
(SP
MT
3)
TM
TM
_(T
M)
(TM
_)
SIN
1
SIN
2
SIN
3
(SE
LIN
1)(S
ELI
N2)
(SE
LIN
3)
(PP
D1)
(PO
D)
(MF
D)
(CE
D1)
(TC
S)
(PM
RD
Y)
DV
S1
(DR
ST
)
(PP
D2)
(PP
D3)
TH
OP
EN
(CE
D2)
DS
WS
(MM
LD)
(SD
SW
)(S
PID
)(S
B4D
)(S
DO
D)
GD
IIN
FW
/SY
NC
(/S
YN
C)
SP
MT
2/M
IRC
NT
(US
BIN
)
For
SP
F/D
SP
F M
odel
Onl
y
(7-E
1)
(7-E
2)
(7-E
3)
(4-D
3)
(7-E
1)
(7-E
2)
(7-E
3)
(7-E
4)
(7-E
4)
(7-E
4)
(7-E
3)(7
-E4)
(7-E
3)(7
-E1)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)
(7-C
4)
(5-E
2)
(8-B
1)
(7-E
4)
(9-D
4)(7
-E4)
(4-C
4)
(4-C
4)
(4-C
4)
(8-C
4)(8
-C4)
(8-A
3)(9
-A2)
(4-B
3)(4
-B3)
(4-B
2)
(1-D
3)(1
-D3)
(1-D
2)
(1-A
3)(1
-A3)
(1-A
3)
(2-A
2)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
(2-B
1)(2
-B1)
(2-B
1)(1
-B3)
(1-B
3)(1
-B3)
(4-A
3)(4
-A3)
(4-A
3)(8
-D3)
(8-D
3)(8
-D3)
(8-D
3)(8
-D3)
(8-D
3)
(6-D
2)(6
-D2)
(6-B
1)(6
-B1)
(6-B
1)(6
-B1)
(1-A
2)(1
-A2)
(1-A
2)(1
-A2)
(2-C
1)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 5
For
SP
F/D
SP
F M
odel
Onl
y
(2-B
1)
(2-B
1)
(2-B
1)
(2-B
1)
(9-E
1)
(9-E
1)
(9-E
1)
(9-E
1)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
(8-A
4)
(8-A
4)(8
-B4)
(8-B
4)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
(2-C
1)
(2-C
1)(2
-B1)
(8-A
3)(9
-A3)
(9-A
3)
(9-B
3)(9
-D3)
(9-C
1)(9
-C2)
(9-A
2)
(9-A
2)
(6-A
1)(6
-A1)
(6-A
1)
(5-E
3)(2
-C1)
(2-C
1)(2
-C1)
(2-B
1)(2
-B1)
(1-D
3)
(8-B
3)
(8-B
4)(9
-A2)
(9-A
2)
(9-A
4)
(6-A
3)(6
-A3)
(6-A
3)(2
-C1)
(2-C
1)
(2-C
1)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
2)
(2-A
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-A
3) (4-A
3)
(5-B
2)
(9-C
2)
or K
ID65
001A
F
or K
ID65
001A
F
or K
ID65
503F
or K
ID65
503F
or K
TA
1505
S
or K
RA
119S
or K
RC
106S
or K
IA39
3F
or K
IA39
3F
or K
IA35
8F
or K
IA35
8F
or K
DS
226
or K
DS
226
21 21
12
21
21 21
21
1 2
1 2
21
21
1 2
123
123
21 21
21 1 2
1 2
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
3 21
8 4
1 2
5 67
8 4
3 21
8 4
5 67
8 4
1B1
2B2
3B3
4B4
5B5
6B6
7B7
E8
CO
M9
1C16
2C15
3C14
4C13
5C12
6C11
7C10
I13
NC
4N
C5
I26
NC
10I3
11N
C12
NC
13
GN
D17
O1
2
O2
7
O3
9
O4
16
CO
M1
CO
M8
GN
D18
I414
NC
15
1B1
2B2
3B3
4B4
5B5
6B6
7B7
G8
NC
9
1C16
2C15
3C14
4C13
5C12
6C11
7C10
1B1
2B2
3B3
4B4
5B5
6B6
7B7
G8
NC
9
1C16
2C15
3C14
4C13
5C12
6C11
7C10
1
2
3
1
2
3
21
1B1
2B2
3B3
4B4
5B5
6B6
7B7
E8
CO
M9
1C16
2C15
3C14
4C13
5C12
6C11
7C10
R15
67.
5kF
R15
94.
3kF
D10
1
MA
700
R15
51M
FR
154
1kF
R15
810
kF
R15
71k
J
C19
722
000p
C19
9
0.1u
R16
930
0JR
170
100J
C19
8
0.1u
D10
2
DA
204K
D10
3
DA
204K
R17
11.
2kF
R17
310
kF
R17
210
kJ
C20
0
2200
0p
D10
4
1SS
133
R15
01.
5kJ
R16
1
47kJ
R16
6
4.7k
J1/
4W
R16
01.
5kJ
R15
11.
5kJ
R15
21.
5kJ
R15
31.
5kJ
R16
21.
5kJ
R16
31.
5kJ
R16
41.
5kJ
R16
51.
5kJ
R16
71.
5kJ
R16
81.
5kJ
R17
424
0JR
175
240J
IC12
0A
NJM
2903
+ -
C19
6
0.1u
IC12
0B
NJM
2903
+ -
IC12
2A
LM35
8
+ -
IC12
2B
LM35
8
+ -
IC12
1
TD
6200
1AF
IC12
3
TD
6206
4AF
IC12
4
TD
6250
3
IC12
5
TD
6250
3
Q10
2D
TA
143X
KA
Q10
12S
A10
36
Q10
3D
TC
143Z
KA
R17
624
0J
IC11
9
TD
6200
1AF
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
12V
24V
24V
24V
INT
5V
24V
12V
VC
C3
VC
C3
VC
C3
12V
VC
C3
12V
12V
12V
VC
C3
5V
5V
MC
BIA
ST
CG
RID
L
CP
FS
1C
PF
S2
MP
FS
RR
SV
FM
VF
MC
NT
MR
PS
1
HL
LDE
N
PM
CLK
PM
D
PR
FT
H
MM
_Y2
MM
DM
M_Y
1
MM
_Y3
SP
US
SP
FS
SR
RC
SG
S
/MC
/BIA
S/T
C/G
RID
L
VF
MO
UT H
LOU
T
/CP
FS
1/C
PF
S2
/MP
FS
/RR
S
/PR
/VF
MC
NT
PM
CLK
_A
/PM
D
MR
PS
_1
/LD
EN
MM
ref1
/MM
D
MM
ref2
MM
ref0
/SG
S
/SP
US
/SR
RC
/SP
FS
MR
PS
_2
FT
H
RT
H
THO
PE
N
RT
H_I
N
PO
FF
/PO
FF
MR
PS
2M
RP
S3
MR
PS
_3
/LE
ND
SH
OLD
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
MC
U P
WB
(D
RIV
ER
SE
CT
ION
2)
5/9
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 6
For
DS
PF
Mod
el O
nly
For
SP
F/D
SP
F M
odel
Onl
y
(8-C
3)(8
-C3)
(8-C
3)(8
-C3)
(2-A
3)(2
-A3)
(2-A
3)
(2-A
3) (2-A
3)(2
-A3)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)
(5-C
2)(5
-C2)
(5-C
2)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(9-D
1)(9
-D1)
(9-E
1)
(9-E
1)
(9-B
3)
(9-B
3)
(9-B
3)
(9-B
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-D
3)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)
(9-A
1)(9
-A1)
21
21
21
12
21 1
2
21
1 2
1 21 2
12
12
1 2
21
21
21 21
1 2
21
21
2121
12
12
1 2
1 2
1 2
12
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
12
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
2121
CrA
23C
rB20
VsA
25R
sA3
Vre
fA24
Vre
fB19
RsB
12V
sB18
In /A
26In
A27
In /B
17In
B16
Vm
m22
OU
T /A
1O
UT
A4
OU
T /B
14O
UT
B11
PG
15P
G28
I13
NC
4N
C5
I26
NC
10I3
11N
C12
NC
13
GN
D17
O1
2
O2
7
O3
9
O4
16
CO
M1
CO
M8
GN
D18
I414
NC
15
OU
T 2
A2
SE
NS
E 2
3C
OM
P 2
4O
UT
2B
5G
ND
6G
ND
7I0
28
I12
9P
HA
SE
210
VR
EF
211
RC
212
VS
S13
RC
114
VR
EF
115
PH
AS
E 1
16I1
117
GN
D18
GN
D19
I01
20O
UT
1B
21C
OM
P 1
22S
EN
SE
123
VS
24O
UT
1A
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
21
21
21
1 2
Vcc
17
GN
D8
Rin
20F
in18
OU
T1
9O
UT
25
VM
16
VR
EF
21R
NF
6
PS
AV
E19
NC
1N
C2
NC
3N
C4
NC
7N
C10
NC
11N
C12
NC
13N
C14
NC
15N
C22
NC
23N
C24
NC
25
FIN
FIN
1 2
1 2
1 2
12
12
R19
930
0J
D10
9
MIT
J22B
R20
547
kJR
204
47kJ
C21
122
00p
R19
17.
5kJ
C21
422
00p
R19
47.
5kJ
C21
8
2200
p
C22
7
OP
EN
C21
6
OP
EN
C21
5O
PE
N
C23
2O
PE
N
C22
2
2200
p
R19
82.
4kJ
R20
32.
4kJ
R19
51k
J
R20
71k
J
C22
0
0.1u
R20
062
0JR
201
1.2k
JR
202
100J
R19
675
0J
CP
101
ICP
-N38
C20
282
0p
C20
382
0pC
204
820p
C20
70.
1u
C20
182
0p
C20
50.
1u
C20
61u
/16V
+
C20
847
u/35
V+
C21
210
u/35
V+
C21
9
47u/
16V
+
D105OPENR
180
1.5k
J
R17
8
0.68
J1W
R18
230
kJR
183
30kJ
R17
91.
5kJ
R17
7
0.68
J1W
R18
651
0JR
185
1kJ
R18
42k
J
R19
71J
2W
R18
11k
J
IC12
8
MT
D13
61/F
IC12
6
TD
6206
4AF
IC12
7
L621
9DS
D106OPEN
D107OPEN
D108OPEN
D112OPEN
CP
102
ICP
-N38
D113OPEN
D114OPEN
D115OPEN
R18
71k
J
R18
81k
J
R20
61J
2W
C21
747
u/16
V+
IC12
9
BA
6920
FP
C20
90.
1u/5
0VC
210
0.1u
/50V
C21
3
0.1u
/50V
CP
201
0603
FA
1.5A
CP
202
0603
FA
1.5A
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
5V
24V
M
24V
5V
5V
24V
M
24V
M
24V
5V
24V
dup
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
24V
dup
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
MM
_PH
_A
OU
T_A
-
MM
_AI0
MM
_PH
_B
MM
_BI0
MM
_BI1
MM
_AI1
OU
T_A
+
OU
T_B
-
MM
ref0
MM
ref1
MM
ref2
DM
T0
/DM
T_0
SP
MT
_2
(SP
MT
2)
DM
T1
DM
T2
DM
T3
/DM
T_1
/DM
T_2
/DM
T_3
(TM
)(T
M_)
SP
MT
_0S
PM
T_3
SP
MT
_1
MR
PS
_1M
RP
S_2
MR
PS
_3
(SP
MT
0)(S
PM
T3)
(SP
MT
1)
OU
T_B
+
TM
B_O
TM
A_O
MC
U P
WB
(D
RIV
ER
SE
CT
ION
3)
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
6/9
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 7
For
SP
F/D
SP
F M
odel
Onl
y
(8-B
4)
(8-A
4)
(8-A
4)
(9-A
3)
(4-A
3)
(9-D
1)(9
-E1)
(9-E
1)(9
-D3)
(9-C
2)
(9-A
2)
(9-C
4)(9
-C4)
(9-A
4)(9
-C1)
(9-C
2)(9
-C3)
(9-D
1)
(9-D
3)(9
-B4)
(8-D
4)
(8-D
4)
(4-A
2)(4
-A2)
(4-A
2)(4
-A3)
(4-A
3)
(4-A
3)
(4-A
3)(4
-A3)
(4-A
3)(4
-A3)
(4-A
3)(4
-A3)
(4-A
3)(4
-A3)
(4-A
3)
(1-D
2)(1
-D2)
(8-B
4)
(8-B
4)
or K
DS
226
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
120
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1 2
1 2
12
12
21
21
123 21
1 2
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
21
21
21
1
23
1
23
1 2
21 1 2
21 1 2
21 1 2
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 221
1 221
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
1
23
21
21
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
1
2
3
1 2
1 2
1 2
21
12 IN
1
GN
D
2OU
T3
1 2
1 2
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
1 2
1
2
3
1 2
1 2
1
2
3
1 2
C26
1
1000
p
R20
810
kJ
C23
3
OP
EN
C23
4
OP
EN
C23
5
OP
EN
C23
6
OP
EN
C23
7
OP
EN
C28
5
0.1u
L124
ZJS
R51
01-2
23
L125
ZJS
R51
01-2
23
C28
6
22u/
16V
+C
288
0.1u
D12
01S
S13
3
D12
41S
S13
3
R21
520
kJ
R21
720
kJ
D11
9
DA
204K
R21
82.
7kJ
C26
0
0.1u
D11
6D
AN
202U
D11
7D
AN
202U
D11
8D
AN
202U
D12
1D
AP
202U
D12
2D
AP
202U
D12
3D
AP
202U
R20
910
kJR
210
10kJ
R21
139
kJR
212
10kJ
C26
2
1000
p
C26
3
1000
p
C26
4
1000
p
C26
5
1000
p
C26
6
1000
p
R21
41k
J
R21
61k
J
R22
110
kJR
222
10kJ
R22
339
kJR
224
10kJ
D12
5D
AN
202U
D12
6D
AN
202U
C27
8
1000
p
C27
9
1000
p
C28
0
1000
p
C28
1
1000
p
C29
0
1000
p
R22
639
kJ
D13
0D
AN
202U
D13
1D
AN
202U
D13
2D
AN
202U
R22
739
kJR
232
3.3k
JR
229
7.5k
JR
230
7.5k
J
C29
1
1000
p
C29
2
1000
p
C29
5
1000
p
C29
3
1000
p
C29
4
1000
p
D12
8D
AP
202U
D12
9D
AP
202U
D13
3D
AP
202U
D13
4D
AP
202U
D13
5D
AP
202U
C23
8
OP
EN
C23
9
OP
EN
C24
0
OP
EN
C24
1
OP
EN
C24
2
OP
EN
C24
3
OP
EN
C24
4
OP
EN
C24
5
OP
EN
C24
6
OP
EN
C24
7
OP
EN
C24
8
OP
EN
C24
9
OP
EN
C25
0
OP
EN
C25
1
OP
EN
C25
2
OP
EN
C25
3
OP
EN
C25
4
OP
EN
C25
5
OP
EN
C25
6
OP
EN
C25
7
OP
EN
C25
8
OP
EN
C25
9
OP
EN
C26
7
OP
EN
C26
8
OP
EN
C26
9
OP
EN
C27
0
OP
EN
C27
1
OP
EN
C27
2
OP
EN
C27
3
OP
EN
C27
4
OP
EN
C27
5
OP
EN
R21
9
0.22
J2W
R22
01k
J2W
BR
160
1kJ
BR
161
1kJ
BR
162
1kJ
L123
ZJS
R51
01-2
23
C27
6
47u/
35V
+C
277
0.1u
/50V
C28
4
47u/
25V
+
R22
568
J2W
D12
71S
S13
3
IC13
0
KIA
7805
C28
3
0.1u
C28
2
47u/
35V
+
BR
163
1kJ
R23
17.
5kJ
R21
310
kJ
R22
810
kJ
C32
3
0.1u
L127
ZJS
R51
01-2
23 C32
2
22u/
16V
+
C28
9
0.1u
L126
ZJS
R51
01-2
23
C28
7
22u/
16V
+
12V
5V
PG
ND
PG
ND
5V
INT
24V
VC
C3
5V
VC
C3
PG
ND
24V
PG
ND
INT
24V
INT
5V
EN
5V
VC
C3
5V
5V
12V
IN
5VIN
DS
WS
24V
1(D
SW
S)
SD
SW
SP
IDS
B4D
PO
D
PM
RD
Y
(SD
SW
)(S
PID
)(S
B4D
)
(PO
D)
(PM
RD
Y)
DV
SE
LT
CS
MF
DM
MLD
DV
S1
(MM
LD)
PP
D1
PP
D2
CE
D1
CE
D2
(PP
D1)
(PP
D2)
(PS
W)
(CE
D1)
(DR
ST
)(C
ED
2)
(TC
S)
(MF
D)
24V
IN
DR
ST
PS
W
PP
D3
SP
PD
(SP
PD
)
(PP
D3)
5VE
N
3.3V
IN
MC
U P
WB
(N
OIS
E F
ILT
ER
/PU
LL
-UP
SE
CT
ION
)7/
9
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 8
To P
ower
uni
t
To S
cann
er u
nit
To In
terf
ace
PW
B
To O
pera
tiona
l PW
B
To M
irro
r m
otor
(5-C
4)(5
-C4)
(5-C
4)(5
-C4)
(5-C
1)
(5-C
3)(5
-D2)
(7-A
1)(7
-A2)
(7-A
2)
(7-B
1)
(4-C
4)
(8-D
3)(8
-B2)
(6-A
4)(6
-A4)
(6-A
4)(6
-A4)
(4-A
3)
(2-E
1)
(2-D
2)(2
-D2)
(2-D
2)(2
-D2)
(2-D
2)(2
-D2)
(2-D
2)
(2-D
2)(2
-D2)
(2-D
1)
(4-C
4)(4
-C4)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)(7-C
1)
(7-C
1)
(1-A
2)
(1-D
2)
(2-B
3)
(2-B
4)
(2-B
4)
(2-B
4)(2
-B4)
(2-B
4)(2
-B4)
(2-B
4)(2
-B4)
(2-B
4)
(2-B
4)
(2-B
4)(2
-B4)
(2-B
4)
(2-D
1)(2
-D1)
(2-D
1)(2
-D1)
(2-D
1)(2
-D1)
(2-D
1)
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
120
or K
RC
106S
or K
RC
106S
or K
DS
226
or K
TA
1281
or K
TC
3198
(1-D
3)
or K
RC
106S
(1-A
2)(1
-D3)
(1-D
3)
VC
L
AF
E_D
B3
AF
E_D
B0
VC
L
AF
E_D
B4
AF
E_D
B6
AF
E_D
B1
AF
E_D
B2
AF
E_D
B5
AF
E_D
B7
PA
RA
D0
PA
RA
D1
PA
RA
D2
PA
RA
D3
PA
RA
D4
PA
RA
D5
PA
RA
D6
PA
RA
D7
1 2
21
1 2
1
23
123
1 2
1 2
1
23
21
21
21
21
1 2
21
11
33
55
77
99
1111
1313
1515
1717
1919
2121
2323
2525
2727
2929
3131
22
44
66
88
1010
1212
1414
1616
1818
2020
2222
2424
2626
2828
3030
3232
21
1 2
12
21
21
12
11
22
33
44
12
1
2
3
1
2
3
21
12
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
1010
1111
1212
1313
1414
1515
1616
1717
1818
1
2
3
21
1 24
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
1010
1111
1212
1313
1414
1515
1616
1717
1818
1919
2020
2121
2222
2323
2424
2525
2626
2727
2828
2929
3030
3131
3232
3333
3434
3535
11
33
55
77
99
1111
1313
1515
1717
1919
2121
2323
22
44
66
88
1010
1212
1414
1616
1818
2020
2222
2424
1 2
1 2
21
C29
947
u/35
V+
R23
810
kJ
C30
1
0.1u
/50V
D13
6D
AN
202U
D13
8
DA
204K
C29
6
1000
p
C29
7
1000
p
D13
7D
AP
202U
R23
410
kJR
233
10kJ
R23
51k
JR
236
1kJ
C29
8
1000
p
R23
71k
J
CN
105
FF
4-32
-S15
D5
Q10
82S
A10
20
R23
947
0J
C30
0
47u/
35V
+D
139
11E
QS
06
L129
220u
H
TW
KA
-221
K
R24
015
kJR
241
56kJ
C30
233
p
Q10
92S
C18
15
CN
103
B4B
-PH
-K-R
CP
103
ICP
-N38
Q10
6
DT
C14
3ZK
A
Q10
7
DT
C14
3ZK
A
R27
515
kJCP
203
0603
FA
1.5A
CN
102
18F
E-B
T-V
K-N
Q11
0
DT
C14
3ZK
A
R28
14.
7kJ
IC13
1
NC
7S08
M5X
C32
8
0.1u
C333OPEN
C331OPEN
C330OPEN
C329OPEN
CN
104
35F
E-B
T-V
K-N
C332OPEN
CN
101
B24
B-P
HD
SS
-BC
334
0.1u
/50V
C33
5
0.1u
/50V
R29
010
kJ
12V
24V
VC
C3
PG
ND
PG
NDIN
T24
V
5V
VC
C3
PG
ND
PG
ND
EN
5V
EN
5V
EN
5V
5V
5V
VC
C3
VC
C3
/BIA
S
PS
W
mt_
at_h
ome
KIN
1K
IN2
DR
ST
(OP
_CLK
)(O
P_L
AT
CH
)
(SE
LIN
1)(S
ELI
N2)
(SE
LIN
3)
(OP
_DA
TA
)
AF
E_D
B[7
..0] A
FE
_SC
KA
DC
LKC
CD
_PH
I1C
CD
_PH
I2C
CD
_CP
CC
D_R
SC
CD
_TG
AF
E_S
EN
AF
E_S
DI
BS
AM
P
VS
AM
P
OU
T_A
+
OU
T_A
-O
UT
_B+
OU
T_B
-
PS
LO
NL
PA
RA
D[7
..0]
GD
IIN
/INIT
/SLC
TIN
/AU
TO
FD
/ST
B
VM
INV
PIN
RC
V
/RE
V
BU
SY
PE
/FA
ULT
SLC
T
VP
OU
TV
MO
UT
SU
SP
EN
D
OE
N
/TC
/PO
FF
HLO
UT
3.3V
IN
24V
IN
/MC
US
BIN
D_C
ON
T
BE
O
CL
/AC
K
/PR
FW
/GR
IDL
5VE
N5V
IN12
VIN
/CL_
RE
SE
T
MC
U P
WB
(CO
NN
EC
TOR
SE
CTI
ON
1)
8/9
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 9
For
SP
F/D
SP
F M
odel
Onl
y
For
SP
F/D
SP
F M
odel
Onl
y
For
DS
PF
Mod
el O
nly
To
Mai
n m
oto
r
To
Fan
mo
tor
To
Inte
rlo
ck s
wit
ch
To
LS
U
Fo
r JT
AG
To
Cas
sett
e d
etec
t
To
Cas
sett
e p
aper
sole
no
id
To
Dup
lex
mot
or
Fo
r d
ebu
g
Fo
r ch
ecke
r
Not
mou
nted
For
DS
PF
Mod
el O
nly
To
To
ner
mo
tor
To
Pap
er p
ass
det
ect
To
Pap
er o
ut
det
ect
To
HL
un
it
To
Mu
lti u
nit
To
Co
ver
op
en d
etec
t
To
2n
d. c
asse
tte
To
SP
F u
nit
(5-C
1)(7
-C3) (5
-C3)
(5-C
3)
(7-B
3)
(7-C
4)(5
-C1)
(5-C
2)
(5-C
2)(5
-D1)
(4-C
4)
(2-A
2)
(2-C
4)(2
-D1)
(2-D
1)(2
-D1)
(1-B
1)(1
-B3)
(1-B
3)
(1-D
3)
(6-B
2)(6
-B2)
(6-D
3)(6
-D3)
(6-D
4)(6
-D4)
(7-C
1)
(5-C
3)
(7-C
2)
(7-C
2)
(7-C
3)
(7-C
4)
(7-C
4)
(7-C
4)
(4-A
2)
(5-C
3)
(5-C
3)
(5-D
3)
(7-C
1)
(5-C
3)
(7-C
4)(7
-C4)
(5-B
2)
(6-C
2)(6
-C2)
(7-C
2)
(5-B
2)(5
-B2)
(5-B
2)
(6-C
2)(6
-C2)
(7-C
3)
To
DV
un
itw
ith
CR
UM
(7-C
3)
For
CR
UM
Mod
el O
nly
To
Res
ist
rolle
rso
len
oid
or K
DS
226
or K
DS
121
or K
DS
120
or K
DS
226
SD
AS
CL
SD
AS
CL
123
21 1 2
11
22
33
21
11
33
55
77
99
1111
1313
22
44
66
88
1010
1212
1414
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
11
22
33
11
22
33
1 2
11
22
33
44
11
22
33
44
55
11
22
33
11
22
33
44
55
66
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
11
33
55
77
99
1111
1313
1515
1717
22
44
66
88
1010
1212
1414
1616
1818
11
33
55
77
99
1111
1313
1515
1717
1919
2121
2323
22
44
66
88
1010
1212
1414
1616
1818
2020
2222
2424
11
33
55
77
99
22
44
66
88
1010
21
21
21
11
22
33
44
11
22
11
22
21
11
22
33
44
55
11
22
33
44
55
11
33
55
77
99
22
44
66
88
1010
1
23
1
23
21
21
21
11
22
33
44
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
11
22
33
11
22
33
21
123
21 21
21
21
D14
0
DA
204K
R24
210
kJ
C30
5
1000
p
CN
109
B3B
-PH
-K-S
R24
41k
J
CN
115
B14
B-P
HD
SS
-B
C3101000p
C3111000p
C3121000p
C3080.1u
C3091000p
CN
111
B3B
-PH
-K-R
CN
113
B3B
-PH
-K-S
C30
4
1000
p
CN
118
B4B
-PH
-K-S
CN
114
B05
B-X
AS
K-1
CN
108
B3B
-PH
-K-K
CN
125
B6B
-PH
-K-S
C30
3
1000
p
C30
7
1000
p
C30
6
1000
p
C3130.1u/50V
C3140.1u/50V
CN
119
B18
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
122
B24
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
121
9204
B-2
-10
R24
810
kJR
249
10kJ
R25
010
kJ
CN
112
B4B
-PH
-K-S
CN
116
B2P
-VH
-R
CN
124
B2P
-VH
R25
115
0J1/
4WC
N12
0
B5B
-PH
-K-S
CN
123
B5B
-PH
-K-R
B10
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
106B
D14
1D
AN
202U
D14
2D
AP
202U
R27
210
J
R27
330
0J
R27
430
0J
B4B
-PH
-K-R
CN
106A
CN
107
08F
E-B
T-V
K-N
CN
110
B3B
-PH
-K-S
CN
117
B3B
-PH
-K-E
R28
21k
J
D14
3
DA
204K
R24
539
0J1/
4W
R24
739
0J1/
4W
R25
339
0J1/
4W
R24
639
0J1/
4W
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
INT
24V
5V24
V24
V
24V
24V
24V
5V
24V
dup
24V
M5V
24V
5V
VC
C3
INT
5V
24V
VC
C3
24V
VC
C3
5V
24V
5V
5V
5V5V
5V
5V
SP
MT
_0
SD
SW
SP
PD
SB
4DS
PID
SP
MT
_3/S
GS
/SR
RC
/SP
US
SP
MT
_2S
PM
T_1
PP
D3
PO
D
/CP
FS
2
/RR
S
(SD
OD
)
CE
D2
PP
D1
PP
D2
MF
D
/MP
FS
TM
A_O
TM
B_O
TxD
1
MM
LD/M
MD V
FM
OU
T
/VF
MC
NT
24V
1(D
SW
S)
/VID
EO
PM
CLK
_AP
MR
DY
/PM
D
SH
OLD
SD
AS
CL
CP
UN
RS
T
/DM
T_0
/DM
T_1
/DM
T_2
/DM
T_3
/CP
FS
1
CE
D1
/LD
EN
JTG
_TD
OJT
G_T
CK
JTG
_TM
SJT
G_T
DI
/SY
NC
RT
H_I
N
TC
SD
VS
EL
/SP
FS
MC
U P
WB
(C
ON
NE
CT
OR
SE
CT
ION
2)
9/9
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 10
LED
M
f1
e1
a1
g1
d1
b1
c1
a2
g2
d2
f2
e2
b2
c2
a3
g3
d3
e3
b3
c3
LED
M
f3
OP
-CLK
OP
-DA
TA
DR
ST
DR
ST
OP
-LA
TC
H
KIN
1K
IN2
SE
LIN
3S
ELI
N2
ON
LP
SL
5VE
N
PS
W
SE
LIN
1
D-G
ND
5VD-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
OP
-ST
B
3
2
1
32
1
3
2
1
/Q333
/Q434
/Q536
/Q637
/Q738
/Q940
/Q1041
/Q1142
/Q171
/Q182
/Q193
/Q204
/Q216
/Q227
/Q238
/Q249
/Q2510
/Q2611
/Q1243
/Q1345
/Q1446
/Q1547
/Q839
/Q232
/Q131
VCC63
/STROBE51
BEO49
/LATCH50
S IN30
CLOCK64
S OUT19
GND15
GND214
GND335
GND444
GND562
/Q3117
/Q3016
/Q2915
/Q2813
/Q2712
/Q3218
/Q1648
1 2 3
D0
4
D1
3
D2
2
D3
1
D4
15
D5
14
D6
13
D7
12
A11
B10
C9
G7
W6
Y5
D0
4
D1
3
D2
2
D3
1
D4
15
D5
14
D6
13
D7
12
A11
B10
C9
G7
W6
Y VC
C
GN
D
VC
C
GN
D
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PE
C31
7
200P
F
C3121000p
C31
9
200P
F
TP
L
C32
2
N.M
.
C3021000p
C32
0
N.M
.
ME
R35
71K
J
R34
912
0J
RP
L
C32
1
N.M
.
R36
251
0J
R31
010
0J
R35
21K
J
AE
C3051000p
R35
651
0J
JPL
R31
310
0J
R31
71K
J
EX
D
R31
210
0J
EX
N
D30
4
1SS
133
R30
810
0J
EX
L
D30
51S
S13
3
R32
110
0J
D30
2
1SS
133
CS
1L
R32
410
0J
EX
MO
DK
BP
L
D30
31S
S13
3
R31
910
0J
D30
71S
S13
3
R33
212
0J
R30
210
0J
R32
912
0J
D30
9
1SS
133
R33
610
0J
D31
0
1SS
133
R33
312
0J
C32
7
200P
F
R32
210
0J
D30
61S
S13
3
R32
812
0J
EX
UP
K
R31
810
0J
R33
012
0J
D30
81S
S13
3
OLK
Q30
1K
RA
225S
1UP
K
R34
112
0J
D30
11S
S13
3
SC
NK
R34
512
0J
R3164.7KJ
R34
212
0J
C3091000p
C32
4
N.M
.
R3154.7KJ
C31
8
2200
0PF
R33
51K
J
R3114.7KJ
R34
412
0J
Q30
3K
RA
225S
R34
01K
J
R34
612
0J
R3554.7KJ
ZU
PK
R34
712
0J
R3234.7KJR
348
120J
R33
81K
J
R3254.7KJ
R34
312
0J
g1
R3204.7KJ
Q30
2K
RA
225S
f1
R3034.7KJ
R36
01K
J
e1
DU
PK
R3374.7KJ
LC79
35A
N
IC30
3
d1
R3054.7KJ
c1
MA
GK
R3064.7KJ
g3
b1
R32
710
0J
g2
a1
R3014.7KJ
f3
DA
A2
C3041000p
SJA
L
C3031000p
CLK
ZP
L
C3141000p
SC
NL
R33
112
0J
R30
910
0J
R36
112
0J
R3074.7KJ
e3
SP
FL
C3061000p
d3
CS
2L
CR
SK
R35
447
0J
R3264.7KJ
c3
3RE
R35
347
0J
R31
410
0J
b3
2RE
10U
PK
N.M
.(M
PL)
a3
1RE
C30
1
47uF
/16V
DU
21
NO
R
ON
LL
C32
5
2200
0PF
PS
W
1EN
R
CN
302
S3B
-PH
-K-S
f2
IC30
2
74H
C15
1
R33
412
0J
R35
015
0J
d2
ZD
WK
IC30
1
74H
C15
1
e2
R35
815
0J
c2
2EN
R
C32
3
0.1u
F
CN
301
18F
E-S
T-V
K-N
b2
C31
1
0.1u
F
C3131000p
a2
C3151000p
DA
A1
C32
6
200P
F
C3071000p
BP
K
DP
L
R35
115
0J
C3081000p
DU
22
R30
41.
5KJ
C3101000p
EX
DW
K
PM
L
R35
91.
5KJ
C3161000p
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
5VE
N
ON
LP
SL
ON
LP
SL
5VE
N
2. O
PE
RA
TIO
N P
WB
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 11
3. I/
F P
WB
F.G
F.G
VM
OO
EN
/AU
TO
FD
/INT
I
5VE
N
VP
O
US
B_I
N
VM
IN
5VE
N
VP
INR
CV
3.3V
SU
SP
EN
D
PE SLC
T
PA
RA
AD
4
PA
RA
AD
7
PA
RA
AD
0P
AR
AA
D1
PA
RA
AD
3
PA
RA
AD
5P
AR
AA
D6
RE
V
/AC
KB
US
Y
/FA
ULT
/SLC
TIN
/ST
B
D_C
ON
T
PA
RA
AD
2
IF_D
ET
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435
HD
1
A9
2A
103
A11
4A
125
A13
6
Vcc
7
A1
8A
29
GN
D10
A3
11A
412
A5
13A
614
GN
D15
A7
16A
817
Vcc
18
PLH
in19
A14
20A
1521
A16
22A
1723
HLH
24H
LHin
25
C17
26C
1627
C15
28C
1429
PLH
30
Vcc
-cab
le31
B8
32B
733
GN
D34
B6
35B
536
B4
37B
338
GN
D39
B2
40B
141
Vcc
-cab
le42
Y13
43Y
1244
Y11
45Y
1046
Y9
47
DIR
48NC
1O
E#
2R
CV
3V
P4
VM
5SU
SPEN
D6
GN
D7
NC
8S
PE
ED
9D
-10
D+
11V
PO
12V
MO
13V
CC
14+
5V1
D-
2D
+3
GN
D4
Shi
eld
A1
GN
D3
VC
C5
B2
Y4
D-G
ND
30
D-G
ND
26
HLH
IN35
D-G
ND
27
/INIT
31
D-G
ND
28
SG
16
D-G
ND
29
NC
15
SLC
T13
NC
34
Dat
a 0
2D
ata
13
FG
17
Dat
a 2
4
D-G
ND
19
Dat
a 3
5
D-G
ND
20
Dat
a 5
7
D-G
ND
21
Dat
a 6
8
D-G
ND
22
/SLC
T IN
36
D-G
ND
23
/AU
TO
FD
14
D-G
ND
24D
-GN
D25
/D S
TB
1
PLH
OU
T18
/AC
K10
BU
SY
11P
E12
/FA
ULT
32
Dat
a 4
6
Dat
a 7
9
D-G
ND
33
Shield
C42
4
0.1u
R40
822
J
CN
403
35F
E-B
T-V
K-N
C42
3
0.1u
R40
922
JR
410
22J
R41
122
J
C40
8
100p
C40
7
100p
R40
1N
.M.
C40
6
100p
R42
3
1.5k
J
C40
5
100p
C41
0
100p
C40
9
100p
C41
1
100p
C40
4
100p
L401
N.M
.
L405
bead
s
C42
6
100p
C41
3
100p
R40
324
J
R41
222
J
C40
3
0.1u
C41
2
100p
R40
224
J
IC40
3
74LV
X16
1284
R42
710
kJ
R41
322
J
C41
5
100p
IC40
1U
SB
_Tra
nsce
iver
C41
4
100p
C41
8
100p
C42
2
100p
C41
7
100p
C41
6
330p
C41
9
100p
L402
N.M
.
R42
9
10kJ
L404
N.M
.
R43
024
J
R40
522
J
R42
610
kJ
C40
2
47u/
16V
+
C42
0
0.1u
CN
402
US
B_C
N
R41
822
J
R42
8
10kJ
R41
922
J
R42
410
kJ
L403
N.M
.
R42
222
J
C42
5
0.1u
D40
1
11E
QS
06
C42
7
0.1u
R42
03.
3KJ
D40
2Z
EN
ER
_6.2
V
R41
422
J
IC40
2
NC
7S08
M5
R41
522
J
C42
1
0.1u
R41
622
J
R40
4
N.M
.(1.
5kJ)
R41
722
JR
421
22J
CN
401
IEE
E12
84_C
N
R40
622
JR
407
22J
R42
510
kJ
C40
1
47u/
16V
+
3.3V
1
3.3V
1
3.3V
15V
1
3.3V
1
3.3V
1
5V1
5V2
5V1
5V2
3.3V
1
3.3V
1
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
44
33
22
11
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 12
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
4. POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY (120V/127V)
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 13
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6 7 8 9 10 11
6 7 8 9 10 11
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 14
5. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAMACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 1/7
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
12
13
14
CN104123456789
1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435
CN119123456789
101112131415161718
PPD2 sensorPWB 12 CN1203
21
3451
2
CN12312345
B5B-PH-K-R
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
For DSPF Model Only For S
B18B-PHDSS-B
B2
4B
-PH
DS
S-B
B5B-PH-K-S
B5
B-X
AS
K-1
B2
P-V
H-S
B4
B-P
H-K
-S
08
FE
-BT
-VK
-N
/VF
MC
NT
MFD
D-GND
24V/MPFSPULUP5V
VF
MO
UT
/MM
D
MM
LD
PG
ND
PG
ND
INT
24
V
INT
24
V
PG
ND
B3
B-P
H-K
-B
B3
B-P
H-K
-S
B3
B-P
H-K
-K
B1
4B
-PH
DS
S-B
PG
ND
/DM
T_2
/DM
T_1
/DM
T_0
24
Vd
up
5V
SB
4D
SD
SW
D-G
ND
SP
IDP
UL
UP
5V
D-G
ND
SP
PD
CN
10
7
CN
11
4/D
MT
_3
PULUP5VPPD2D-GNDRTH_IN
24V
D-GNDD-GNDP-GNDPMCLK_APMRDY/PMDP-GND
D-GND/LDEN
/SYNC
D-GND
/VIDEOSHOLD
PU
LU
P5
V
PO
D
D-G
ND
CN
11
3
PG
ND
CN
12
4
CN
11
2
TM
B-
TM
A-
B3
B-P
H-K
-S
D-GNDD-GNDVCC3EN5VEN5VUSBIND_CONTVPOUTVMOUTOENRCVVPIN
PARAD3PARAD4PARAD5
VMINSUSPENDPARAD0PARAD1PARAD2
PARAD6PARAD7/REV/FAULT
/AUTOFD/STB
/ACKBUSYPESLCT
24
V
/RR
S
/CP
FS
2
24
V
5V
CN
11
7
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
PP
D3
24
V
/CP
FS
1
CN
11
0
CE
D1
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
CN
10
8
CE
D2
D-G
ND
CN
11
5
RTH_IN
GDIIND-GNDD-GND
PULUP5VPPD2D-GND
INT5V
35FE-BT-VK-N
/INT/SLCTIN
D-GND
D-GND
MCU
interface
PWB(GDI)
(USB)
LSU(POLYGON MT)
FANMT
MAINMT
DUPLEXMTTONER
MT
2nd
cassette
Cassette paper
SolenoideResist roller
SolenoideCassette detect
Paper out
detecter
Fuser unit
Manual PaperFeeding unit
Thermisto
*C
*F
*E
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 15
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
12
13
14 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
CN102123456789
101112131415161718
CN105123456789
1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132
CN1061234
CN101123456789
101112131415161718192021222324
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 1 2 3 1 2
For DSPF Model Only For SPF/DSPF Model OnlyFor DSPF Model Only
B2
4B
-PH
DS
S-B
B24B-PHDSS-B
B5
B-X
AS
K-1
CN
10
9
B2
P-V
H-R
B4B-PH-K-R
/GRIDL/TC/BIAS
INT24V
D-GND
FE4-32-S15D5
18FE-BT-VK-N
B3
B-P
H-K
-K
B1
4B
-PH
DS
S-B
PGNDPGND
VCLVCL
/DM
T_2
/DM
T_1
/DM
T_0
24
Vd
up
5V
SB
4D
SD
SW
D-G
ND
SP
IDP
UL
UP
5V
D-G
ND
SP
PD
24
V
/SP
US
24
V
/SR
RC
24
V
/SP
FS
CN
11
4/D
MT
_3
5V
24
VM
CN
12
2
24
VM
B3
B-P
H-K
-S
SP
MT
-0
SP
MT
-2S
PM
T-3
SP
MT
-1
24
V
/SG
S
PGNDD-GND/MC
5VIN3.3VIN5VEN3.3VIN
D-GND
PGNDPGNDHLOUT/PR24VINFW24VIN12VIN/POFF
24VTCS
DVSEL
D-GNDCCD-RS
CCD-CPAFE_SDI
BSAMP
(mt_at_home)AFE_DB7
12V12V
EN5V
B4
B-P
H-K
-R
D-GND(ONL)(PSL)EN5V
D-GNDSELIN3
VSAMPCCD-TG
ADCLKAFE_SEN
CCD-PHI2D-GND
CCD-PHI1
AFE_SCKD-GND
AFE_DB3AFE_DB2AFE_DB1AFE_DB0
AFE_DB5AFE_DB6
D-GNDAFE_DB4
CN
11
62
4V
1(D
SW
S)
24
V
D-G
ND
(SD
OD
)
/CP
FS
2
24
V
5V
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
PP
D3
CN
11
1
CE
D1
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
CN
10
8
CE
D2
D-G
ND
CN
11
5
PU
LU
P5
V
PP
D1
D-G
ND
B3
B-P
H-K
-R
SELIN2SELIN1
(KIN2)PSW
5V
OP-DATAOP-LATCH
OP-CLK(BEO)(KIN1)
D-GND
D-GND
OU
T_
A+
OU
T_
B+
OU
T_
A-
OU
T_
B-
CN
10
3
DRST
MCU
Powerunit
Scanner(CCD)
ScannerMT
DUPLEXMT
2nd
cassette
DV
INTERLOCK SW(SIDE DOOR SW)
SPFUNIT
Cassette detect Paper pass detect
Cover open
detecter
Operational PWB
*D
*A
*B
*B
*E
*A – E have detail view
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 16
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 2/7 (POWER UNIT)
CN1061234
1 1 1 1 2
CN1012
CN101 CN612345678
12345678
91011 CN101 CN00212 1 113 2 2 114 3 3 215 4 416 517 618 719 820 921 1022 1123 12 CN00124 13 1 AC-ORD
14 21516
F-GNDDV-BIAS
HLN
PGNDPGND
24VTCS
DVSEL
HLL
D-GND
PGNDPGNDHLOUT/PR24VINFW24VIN12VIN/POFF
PGNDD-GND/MC
5VIN3.3VIN5VEN3.3VIN
B24B-PHDSS
B4B-PH-K-R
/GRIDL/TC/BIAS
INT24VINT24V
D-GND
INT24VINT24V
/BIAS/TC
/MC/GRIDL
D-GNDPGNDD-GND3.3VIN
HLOUTLN
12VIN24VINFW24VIN
HLN
/PR
5VEN3.3VIN5VIN/POFF
MC
-CA
SE
MC
-OU
T
TC
-OU
T
BC
-OU
T
GR
ID
HLL
LOW VOLTAGEPOWER SUPPLY UNIT
HIGH VOLTAGEPOWER SUPPLY UNIT
HeaterLamp
POWER UNIT
DV UNIT
Thermostat
A
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 17
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 3/7 (SCANNER UNIT)
CN105 CN1 JP11 12 23456789
123456789
10 1011 1112 1213 1314 1415 1516 1617 1718 1819 1920 2021 2122 2223 2324 2425 2526 2627 2728 2829 2930 3031 3132 32
CN102 CN301 CN3021 12 23 3456789
123456789
10 1011 1112 1213 1314 1415 1516 1617 1718 18
FE4-32-S15D5
PGNDPGND
VCLVCL
AFE_SDI
BSAMP
(mt_at_home)AFE_DB7
12V12V
D-GNDAFE_OBE
VSAMPCCD-TG
ADCLKAFE_SEN
CCD-PHI2D-GND
CCD-PHI1
D-GNDCCD-RS
CCD-CP
AFE_SCKD-GND
AFE_DB3AFE_DB2AFE_DB1AFE_DB0
AFE_DB5AFE_DB6
D-GNDAFE_DB4
PGNDPGND
VCLVCL12V12V
D-GNDAFE_OBE
VSAMPCCD-TG
D-GNDCCD-RSBSAMP
CCD-CPAFE_SDI
CCD-PHI2D-GND
CCD-PHI1AFE_SEN
ADCLKD-GND
AFE_SCKAFE_DB7
(mt_at_home)AFE_DB5AFE_DB6
D-GNDAFE_DB4AFE_DB3AFE_DB2AFE_DB1AFE_DB0
PGNDVCL
D-GNDSELIN3SELIN2
(KIN1)
OP-DATAOP-LATCH
OP-CLK(BEO)
SELIN1
D-GND(ONL)(PSL)5VEN
DRSTD-GND
D-GND(ONL)(PSL)5VEN
D-GNDSELIN3SELIN2SELIN1
D-GND18FE-BT-VK-N
(KIN2)PSW
5VDRST
DRST
(KIN1)(KIN2)
OP-CLK(BEO)
D-GND
PSW5V
OP-DATAOP-LATCH
CCD PWB
LAMP
LAMP
SUCANNER UNIT
OPERATIONPANEL PWB
DRM RESET SW
INVERTER
B
B
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 18
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 4/7 (INTERFACE)
CN11234
USB_CN
CN104 CN2 CN31 35 12 34 23 33 34 32 45 31 56 30 67 29 78 28 89 27 9
10 26 1011 25 1112 24 1213 23 1314 22 1415 21 1516 20 1617 19 1718 18 1819 17 1920 16 2021 15 2122 14 2223 13 2324 12 2425 11 2526 10 2627 9 2728 8 2829 7 2930 6 3031 5 3132 4 3233 3 3334 2 3435 1 35
35FE-BT-VK-N 36IEEE1284_CN
HLHIN/SLCTIN
V5D-D+
GND
D-GND/INT/FAULTD-GND
D-GNDD-GNDD-GNDD-GND
D-GNDD-GNDD-GNDD-GND
PLHOUTD-GNDD-GNDD-GND
/AUTOFD
SGFG
/ACKBUSYPESLCT
35FE-BT-VK-N
/D STBDATA0DATA1DATA2DATA3DATA4DATA5DATA6DATA7
/INT
/STB
D-GNDD-GND
/SLCTIN/AUTOFD
GDIIN
/ACKBUSYPESLCT
PARAD6PARAD7/REV/FAULT
PARAD2PARAD3PARAD4PARAD5
VMINSUSPENDPARAD0PARAD1
VMOUTOENRCVVPIN
EN5VUSBIND_CONTVPOUT
D-GNDD-GNDVCC3EN5V
D-GNDD-GND
/ACKBUSYPESLCT
/SLCTIN/AUTOFD
GDIIN
PARAD7PARAD6
/INT
/STB
RCVVPIN
SUSPENDPARAD0
PARAD4
PARAD1PARAD2PARAD3
D-GNDD-GNDVCC3EN5V
VMIN
/FAULT/REV
EN5VUSBIND_CONTVPOUTVMOUTOEN
PARAD5
interface PWB
CC C
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 19
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 5/7 (SPF, R-SPF UNIT)
CN105123456789 CN101
10 1 511 2
12
412 3
123
313 4 214 5 11516171819 120 221 322 423 524 6
12
12
12
CN105123456789 CN101
10 1 511 2
12
412 3
123
313 4 214 5 11516171819 120 221 322 423 524 6
/SRRC
24V
24V/SRRC
D-GND/SPUS
24V SPID/SPFS
5V
D-GNDSPPDD-GND
PULUP5VSPID
SPMT-1SPMT-0
SB4D5V
PULUP5VD-GND
/SPUS24V
/SGS
24V
24VMSPMT-224VM
24VM
SDSW
SPMT-0SPMT-2
/SPUS24V
D-GND
PULUP5V
24V/SPUS
SPPDD-GND
SPMT-3SPMT-1
D-GND
D-GNDSPPDD-GND
PULUP5VSPID
SDSWSB4D
5V
SDSWSPID
24VM
5V
SPIDSDSW
SPMT-3
/SGS24V
SPMT-1SPMT-3SPMT-2SPMT-024VM24VM
24VM
5V
SPMT-0
SDSW
SPPD
24V/SPFS
24V
SPMT-1
D-GNDSDSWSPID
5V
24VMSPMT-2SPMT-3
SPFSENSOR PWB
SPF UNIT
SPFMOTOR
PU SOLENOID
SPF SENSOR
R-SPF UNIT
SPFMOTOR
PU SOLENOID
SPF SENSOR
TRANSPORTCLUCH
R-SOLENOID
G-SOLENOID
D
D
SPFSENSOR PWB
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 20
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 6/7 (2ND PAPER FEEDING UNIT)
CN115123 14 256 17 289 1
10 211 3121314
CN1151 1 142 2 133 3 12 14 4 11 25 5 106 6 9 17 7 8 28 8 79 9 6 1
10 10 5 211 11 4 312 12 313 13 214 14 1
OED2 OED2D-GND D-GND
5VD-GND D-GND
D-GNDD-GND D-GND PPD3
D-GND D-GND
OED2PPD3 PPD3 D-GND
/CPFS25V 5V 24V
24V 24V/CPFS2
5V
/CPFS224V
D-GNDPPD3
OED2D-GND
D-GND
D-GNDOED2
/CPFS2
/CPFS224V
D-GND
PPD3D-GND
5V
2nd Paper feeding unit
PHOTO SENSOR
TRAY DETECTSWITCH
PF SOLENOID
E
2nd Paper feeding unit (OPTION)
PHOTO SENSOR
TRAY DETECTSWITCH
PF SOLENOID
E
AL-1551CS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 21
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 7/7 (MANUAL PAPER FEEDING UNIT)
CN12312345
B5B-PH-K-R
CN12312345
B5B-PH-K-R
PULUP5VMFDD-GND
24V/MPFS
Multi Manual Paper Feeding unit
Multi feedingsolenoid
F
Single Manual Paper Feeding unit
MFD sensor PWB
Manual Paper Feeding unit
Contains lithium-ion battery. Must be disposed of properly.Remove the battery from the product and contact
federal or state environmentalagencies for information on recycling and disposal options.
(For USA,CANADA)CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
All rights reserved.Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgmentsWindows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.and other countries.IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
cCOPYRIGHT 2002 BY SHARP CORPORATIONcc
SHARP CORPORATIONDigital Document System GroupProducts Quality Assurance DepartmentYamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2002 May Printed in Japan